Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (186 trang)

GIAO AM ANH 8 CA NAM

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (902.41 KB, 186 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>Teaching plan English grade 8</b>



<b>The first semester</b>



<b>Period 1 consolidation </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>Students will be able to remind something about grade 7 and </i>
<i>know how to learn well in the new school year . </i>


B <b>/ Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , chalks , boards ,,,,</i>
C / <b>Procedure :</b>


I / <b>Revision</b> :
1. The tenses :
- Present simple
- Present progressive
- Simple future
- Near future
- Past simple


=> Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of each tense
2. Exercise : Change these sentences into other tenses (
Present simple , Present progressive , near future ,
Simple future and Past simple ) and add appropriate
adverbs of time .


1. She is in Grade 7


2. They are playing soccer
3. She went to Ha Noi last week
4. I will visit my sister next week


5. Mai is going to build a new house .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback


II/ <b>Presenting the English Grade 8</b>


- There are 16 units in this program , each unit has 6
parts Which mention a particular skill such as


Listening . Speaking , Reading and Writing


+ At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting started “ to
lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up .


-Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to
summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in each
one .


Introduce some books , reference books to students
III / <b>Preparation</b> :


- Ask Ss to prepare Unit 1 “ Getting started + Listen
and read “


Listen and repeat the uses
and forms of them


Copy down



Work in pairs to practice
changing these sentences
into other tenses .


Listen to the introduction


Listen and copy .
Preparing date : 18 / 8 / 2010


<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>



<b> Period 2 lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Hoa </i>
<i>LAN _ Nine and read the dialogue for details and review simple present and simple past </i>
<i>tenses .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b><i>: Text books , cards , cassette , chalk ...</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


<b>time</b> <b>Teacher</b>’<b><sub>s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>,<sub>activities</sub></b>


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Pelmanism</b>


meet come live think send thought
receive met lived received came sent


Work in groups



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Remark and lead in new lesson .
II / <b>Presentation</b> :


1. <i>Pre- reading</i>


a) Pre- teach vocabulary : Introduce the aims and
some new words


- to seem ( translation )


- a next door neighbor : a person who lives next to
your house


- to look like ( translation )


* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
b) Pre- questions


- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in
pairs to answer them


1. Is Nien Lan,<sub>s friend or Hoa</sub>,<sub>s friend ?</sub>


2. How old is Nien ?
3. Where does Nien live ?
4. Is she a beautiful girl ?
- Give feedback


2. <i><b>While </b></i>–<i><b> reading</b></i> :



- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
dialogue between Hoa , Lan and Nien . Then
check if their answers are correct or not
Answers :


1. She is Hoa,<sub>s friend .</sub>


2. She is 12 years old .
3. She lives in Hue .
4. Yes , she is .


a) <b>Comprehension questions</b>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and answer the
questions in exercise 2 / page 11


- Have them work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class and correct their mistakes or pronunciation .
- Correct and give feedback :


a) She lives in Hue
b) No , she does not .


c) The sentence is “ She was not old enough to be
in my class. “


d) At Christmas



- Ask them to work in open pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions and the dialogue .
b) <b>Gap filling</b>


- Ask Ss to use the present simple and simple past
tense to complete the paragraph , using some verbs
: live – send – be – come


<i>Hoa ... in Hue last year , but now she ....in Ha </i>
<i>Noi . Yesterday , Hoa ,<sub>s friend Nien ... Hoa a </sub></i>
<i>letter . Nien ... Hoa,<sub> neighbor when Hoa lived in </sub></i>
<i>Hue . She ... younger than Hoa . She ... to Ha </i>
<i>Noi in December</i> .


- Get Ss to work individually and then compare
their answers with their partners .


- Give feedback


lived – lives – sent – was – is - comes


- Call on some Ss to read the completed paragraph
in front of class .


3. <i><b>Post - reading</b></i> : <b>Writing </b>


- Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan .
- Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the simple
present or past tense to write individually .



Listen and write down .
Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually


Guess its meanings
Copy down


Play game in whole class.
Work in pairs


Listen carefully


Repeat all the correct
answers and copy down
Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of
class.


Practice asking and
answering the questions
and the dialogue .


Complete the paragraph
individually .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

* <b>Cues</b> :


<i>a. Lan / Hoa,<sub>s best friend </sub></i>



<i>b. They / same class / Quang Trung School .</i>
<i>c. Last year / Hoa / to school first time .</i>
<i>d. Lan / show / round / introduce / to new </i>


<i>friends</i> .


- Let Ss discuss with their partners .


- Choose some answers and correct them in front
of the class .


III / <b>Home work</b> :


1. Rewrite all the answers and complete paragraph
on their notebooks .


2. Do Exercise ...in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Write a paragraph about
Hoa , Lan


Demonstrate in front of
class .


Listen and copy






Preparing date :19 / 8 / 2010


<b>Unit 1 : My friend</b>



<b>Period 3 Lesson 2 : Speak and listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to describe someone .</i>
<i> Listen to the dialogues and complete it</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , pictures , chalks ...</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


Teacher<b> s activities’</b>
A : SPEAK


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <i><b>Brainstorming</b></i>


- Ask Ss to think of the adjectives used to describe
body build and hair .




thin


* Possible answers :


- fat - straight
- slim - long
- tall



- short - Color : black / dark
- overweight blond / fair
- slender brown
II / <b>Presentation</b> :


- Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask them to describe
her hair , her body build .


Ex : She has long blond hair
She is short and thin


<b>Form</b> <b>S + have / has + adjective + hair </b>
<b> S + be + adjectives </b>


III / <b>Practice </b>:
1. Word cue drill


Students’ activities


Work in group


Read all the adjectives
aloud .


Look at the picture and
read the example aloud
Copy and give some
examples .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Prepare 6 cards so that students can drill easily .


a. He / tall / thin b. She / short / slim


c. He / short / fat d. Long / black
e. Curly / blond f. Straight / brown


- Ask Ss to read their complete sentences aloud
- Correct and give feedback


a. He is tall and thin . b. She is short and slim .
c. He is short and fat . d. She has long black hair .
e. She has curly blond hair . f. She has straight brown
hair .


2. Practice speaking


- Ask Ss to look at six people in their books .


- Call on a student to describe one person , the others
have to guess who he / she is


* Example :


S1 : This person is short and thin . She has long blond
hair .


S2 : Is this Mary ?


 Yes


- Go on until six people on the poster are described


IV . <b>Post speaking</b> : <b>Writing</b>


- Ask Ss to write all the sentences they have described
above .


B ; listen
I / <b>Pre- listening</b>:


- Ask Ss to look at the expressions in the box and make
sure they know their meanings .


How do you do ?
Nice to meet you


It is a pleasure to meet you .
I would like you to meet
Come and meet


- Get Ss to guess and to complete four dialogues ,
using the given expressions .


- Have Ss read their predictions and write them on the
board


II / <b>While - Listening</b> :


- Let Ss listen to the tape twice .


- Get Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogues and
compare with their predictions .



- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues in
front of class .


- Correct and give feedback


1. I would like you to meet .... 2. Nice to meet you ,
3. I would like you to meet ...4. It,<sub>s a pleasure to meet </sub>


you ,


5. Come and meet 6. How do you do ?
- Ask Ss to practice speaking the dialogues .
III/ <b>Post - Listening</b> :


- Call on some Ss to play roles of Nam – Hoa –
Thu / Khai – Mrs Lien – Mrs Vi / Ba – Bao –
Grandmother / Mr Lam – Mrs Linh – Mr Thanh and
practice the dialogues .


- Correct their pronunciation


- Let Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogues .
IV / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy all the right sentences above .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Work individually



Read the sentences aloud .


Practice speaking in front
of class.


.Write their sentences
alone


Look at the expressions
in the box .


Read them aloud .
Copy down


Guess the complete
expressions in the
dialogues .


Read their predictions
Listen to the tape carefully
Work in pairs and


compare with their
predictions


Practice the complete
dialogues





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

Dân Tiến, ngày.... tháng 08 năm 2010
Ký duyệt


Nguyễn Thị Tám
Preparing date : 20 / 08 / 2010


<b>Unit 1 : My friend</b>



<b>Period 4 Lesson 3 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Ba,<sub>s </sub></i>
<i>friend</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , cassette , chalks , board..</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up : Chatting</b>


Ask Ss to look at four pictures on page 10 and talk
about the activities they want to do after school or in
their free time and ask some questions :


1.What are these students doing ?


( play soccer / play chess / read books / play volleyball
)


2. What time of the day do you think it is ?
( in the morning / evening , after school )


3. Do you like soccer / reading books ...?
4. Whom do you like playing with ?


- Correct mistakes if any and lead in the new lesson .
II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the aims and some new
words to students


1. <i>Pre- teach vocabulary</i> :
- a character ( translation )


- an orphanage : a place where children without
parents live


- reserved (adj)
- sociable (adj)


- to tell jokes = to tell a story which makes people
laugh


- sense of humor ( translation )


* <i>Checking vocabulary</i> : What and where


- Write the word on the board , put one word in each
circle


2. <i>T/F statements predictions</i>


- Stick the poster of T / F statements are about Ba and
his friends , read them and guess which statements are


true , which are false :


a. Ba only has three friends – Bao , Song , Khai .
b. Ba and his friends have the same characters .
c. Bao – Song – Khai are quite reserved in public .
d. They all enjoy school and study hard .


- Get Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


III / <b>While - reading</b>


- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text carefully
and check their predictions :


- Give feedback <b>a. F b. F c. F d. T</b>
- Ask Ss to correct the false statements
* <b>Correction:</b>


a. Ba has a lot of friends , but he spends most of his
time with Bao , Song . Khai .


b. They have different characters .


c. Only Song and Khai are quite reserved .


Work in groups



Listen carefully
Listen and repeat
Guess its meanings and
copy


Play games


Work in pairs to predict
Read their predictions
Read the text and check
their predictions


Correct the false
statements and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud
1. <i>Choose the best answer and write</i> :
- Explain the meanings of the phrases :


+ does not affect his school work : không ảnh hởng tới
việc học


+ rather shy : hơi nhút nhát
+ get tired of : nhàm chán


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to choose the best answers .
- Call on some pairs to report their answers


- Listen and correct . Then give feed back
a. A b. C c . B d. D


2. <i>Now answer the questions</i> :


- Let Ss read the text again and work in pairs .


- Call on some pairs of students to ask and answer the
questions


- Correct and give feedback


a. He feels lucky having a lot of friends .
b. Bao is the most sociable


c. Khai likes reading


d. His jokes sometimes annoy his friends .


e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at
local orphanage .


- Let Ss practice asking and answering the questions in
open pairs .


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk to one another
about their friends , using the adjectives they have just
learnt to describe .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class.
V / <b>Homework</b> :



1. Write a paragraph about one close friend ( about 50
words )


2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Read the text aloud
( 3 Ss )
Listen and copy down


Work in pairs to do the
exercise


Read their answers aloud
Copy down


Practice asking and
answering the questions


Copy the right answers


Work in groups to talk
about their friends
Demonstrate in front of
class.


Listen and copy



Preparing date : 2 / 09 / 2010


<b>Unit 1 : My friend</b>



<b>Period 5 Lesson 4: write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a
<i>paragraph about their close friends. </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , pictures , chalks , boards...
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> <b>Slap the board</b>


<i>( Using the words they have learnt in the previous </i>
<i>lesson ) </i>


II / <b>Pre - writing</b> :
<i>* Reading :</i>


- Ask Ss to read the information about Tam , then
answer some questions .


a. What is his name ?
b. How old is he ?


c. What does he look like ?
d. What is he like ?


e. Where does he live ?


f. Whom does he live with ?


Play games


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

g. Who is his friend ?


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .


- Correct and give feedback
a. Le Van Tam


b. He is 14


c. he is tall and thin . He has short black hair .
d. He is sociable , humorous and helpful
e. He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street , Ha Noi .


f . He lives with his mother and an elder brother .
g . Ba and Bao


III / <b>While - writing</b> :


- Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam , using the
information they have just got .


- Work individually . Then compare with the
paragraph in their books .


- Ask Ss to write some information about one of


their friends , then write a paragraph about her /
him .


- Get Ss to share with their partners and correct if
possible .


* Sample :


His / her name ... . He / she is ...
<i>years old . He / she ...lives at ... in ... </i>
<i>with ... He / she is ... . He / she </i>


<i>has ...hair . He / she is ...helpful .</i>
<i>He / she has ... friends , but his / her </i>
<i>close friends are ... and ... . </i>


- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
IV / <b>Post - writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to write a similar paragraph about himself
/ her self


- Go around the class and help Ss , then ask some
Ss to speak in front of class a bout himself / herself
V <b>/ Homework</b> :


1. Write a paragraph about one of their family
members .


2. Prepare the next lesson .



Practice asking and
answering the questions


Write a paragraph about
Tam individually


Read their writings
aloud .


Write another paragraph
, using the sample .


Demonstrate in front of
class.


Write about himself /
herself .


Listen and copy .


<b> </b> Preparing date : 2 / 09 / 2010


<b>Unit 1 : My friend</b>



<b>Period 6 : Lesson 5 : Language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to review the simple
<i>present tense to talk about general truths and write some sentences , using the structure </i>“
<i>(not) + adjectives enough + to infinitive </i>



B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , chalks , boards ...
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Kim,<sub>s game </sub></b>
( Using language focus 3 )


- Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 17 quickly .
Then let them keep their books closed .


- Divide the class into four groups .


- Give Ss two questions , the group which answers
correctly the fastest wins the game .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

a. How many people are there in the picture ?
( Four )


b. What is each person wearing ?


- The Woman is wearing a red shirt and a green
skirt .


- The man who is standing beside the car is
wearing brown trousers and a yellow shirt .
- The man who is standing on the pavement is
wearing a pink shirt and blue trousers .


- The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt .
II / <b>Presentation</b> :



1. Grammar :
a. Present simple :


* Present simple to talk about general truths - It is
used to express an action which is always true .
b. Past simple :


c. (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive
Example : She is old enough to see that film .
She is not clever enough to this thing .


<b>2. Exercise</b> :


<i>Ex 1: Complete the paragraphs . Use the correct </i>
form of the verbs in brackets


- Ask Ss to work individually and then compare
their answers with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback


a. 1- lives 2- sent 3- was 4- is


b. 1- are 2- came 3- showed 4- introduced
<i>Ex 2 : Complete the dialogue .</i>


- Explain some new words :



+ a planet : the sun , the moon , the earth ...
+ Mars / Mercury ( translation )


+ silly ( adj) ( translation )


- Ask them to read the words in the box .


- Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and
Tuan , his young cousin .


- Call on some pairs to practice the complete
dialogue .


- Correct their pronunciation and give feedback
1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- is
<i>Ex 4 : Set the scene to introduce the aims of the </i>
exercise :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to read the complete dialogue
- Correct and give feedback


a. not big enough
b. not old enough
c. strong enough
d. good enough
III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Ask Ss to write five sentences about


themselves , using the structure : (not) +
adjective enough + to – infinitive .
2. Prepare the next lesson


Play game


Listen and copy


Read the example and
give some more .


Work individually
Read their answers
aloud .


Copy down


Listen and copy


Read the words in the
box and complete the
dialogue .


Practice the dialogue


Copy down
Listen carefully .
Work in pairs


Practice the dialogues



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

D©n TiÕn, ngày.... tháng 08 năm 2010
Ký duyệt


Nguyễn Thị Tám
Preparing date : 02 / 09 / 2010


Unit 2: Making arrangements



<b>Period 7 lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the telephone to </i>
<i>make and confirm arrangements .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks, poster , pictures ..</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Matching ( Getting started )</b>
- Ask Ss to match each object with its name
* Answers :


a. an answering machine
b. a mobile phone


c. a fax machine


d. a telephone directory
e. a public telephone
f. an address book



- Give the definitions of these objects on a poster and
ask Ss to match the object with its definition .


* Definition :
1. to send fax


2. to find someone ,<sub>s telephone number </sub>


3. to write address and telephone numbers
4. to make a phone call in street telephone box .
5. to leave and take messages


6. to make phone call anywhere you like
* Answers : a-5 b-6 c-1 d-2 e- 4 f-3
II / <b>New lesson</b> :


1. <i>Pre- reading</i> :
a. Open prediction :


- Set the scene “ Hoa and Nga are talking on the phone
. They are talking about going to see a movie “


- Ask Ss to guess :
a. Who made the call ?
b. Who introduced herself ?


c. Who invented the other to the movies ?
d. Who arranged a meeting place ?



e. Who arranged the time ?
f. Who agreed to the time ?


- Have them work in pairs to guess the answers .
- Call on some pairs to report the answers and write
them on the board .


2. <i>While </i>–<i> reading</i> :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
conversation between Nga and Hoa , then give them
feedback .


* Answers :


a. Nga made the call
b. Nga introduced herself .


c. Nga invited Hoa to the movies .
d. Nga arranged a meeting place .
e. Hoa arranged the time .


Work in groups


Listen and copy down


Listen to the scene


Work in pairs



Read their predictions
Listen to the tape , read
the conversation to check
their predictions


Practice asking and
answering the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

f. Nga agreed the time .


- Get some Ss to read the conversation aloud . Correct
pronunciation if any


I – Comprehension questions :


- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in pairs
to answer them .


1. What is Hoa,<sub>s telephone number ? </sub>


2. Which movie are they going to see ? Where ?
3. How is Hoa going to see the movies ?


4. Where are they going to meet ? What time ?
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Remark and give feedback .


1. Her telephone number is 3847329.


2. They are going to see the movie Dream City at Sao


Mai Movie Theater .


3. Hoa is going by bike .


4.They are going to meet outside the theater at6.30
- Get some pairs to practice asking and answering the
questions ( open pairs )


II – Matching the phrases with their meanings .


A B


1. Hold on a.Nó đợc chiếu ở đâu
2. Is six thirty all right ? b. khá xa ...


3. Where is it on ? c. Sáu giờ 30 đợc chứ
4. A bit far from .. d.( Cầm máy ) chờ nhé


 Answers : 1- d 2- c 3- a 4- b
3. Post- reading :


* Role play :


- Ask Ss to play the roles of two Ss who are talking on
the phone making arrangements .


- Let Ss work in pairs and move around the class and
help Ss .


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .


III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Ask Ss to make a similar dialogue on their
notebooks .


2. Do exercise ( ...) in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Read the conversations
aloud ( in pairs )


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of
class .


Practice asking and
answering the questions


Work individually


Work in pairs
Play the roles of the
dialogue


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 21 / 09 / 2009


Unit 2: Making arrangements




<b>Period 8 Lesson 2 : Speak & listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk on the phone </i>
<i>about intentions with Going To </i>


<i> -To complete a telephone massage by listening</i>
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , cards , chalks , ....</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting</b>


- Talk to Ss to about using telephone .
1. Do you have a telephone at home ?
2. How often do you make a phone call ?


3. What would you say when you pick up the phone to
answer it ?


4. What would you say if you are the caller ?
II / <b> SPEAK:</b> 1. <b>Pre- speaking</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put the sentences
in the correct order to make a complete conversation .
- Call on some pairs to read their answers and write
them on the board :


* <i>Answers</i> : 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c
7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d



- Call on some pairs to practice the conversation they
have arranged .


-Ask Ss some questions to check Ss,<sub>understanding and </sub>


focus on the structure GOING TO


a. Are they talking on the phone ?
b. What do they intend to do ?


c. What time are they meeting ? Where ?


d. What form of the verbs do you use to talk about
intentions ?


=> S + BE + GOING TO + INFINITIVE
=> Express an intention


2. <b>While - speaking</b> :


- Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making arrangements
to play chess “


- Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the
dialogue .


- Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Bao to
practice the dialogue .


- Listen and give feedback


Ba : Hello . 8257012


Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This is Bao .
Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ?


Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ?
Ba : Great . Me too.


Bao : can you play chess tonight ?


Ba : I am sorry . I can not play chess tonight . I am
going to do my homework .


Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ?
Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine .


Bao : I will meet you at the Center Chess Club .


Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok . Let ,<sub>s meet at the</sub>


front door .


Bao : Is 2,00 o,<sub>clock OK ? </sub>


Ba : Great . See you tomorrow afternoon at 2.00
o,<sub>clock . </sub>


- Ask Ss to make the similar arrangements and practice
talking with a partner .



3. <b>Post speaking</b> :


- Ask Ss to make sentences with “ Going to +
Infinitive “


Model sentences :


<b>Are you going to see a movie ?</b>
<b>Yes , I am / No , I am not .</b>


a. see a movie ( Yes ) b. play / sports ( No)


c.meet your friends ( Yes) d. help your mother ( Yes)
e . do your homework (No) f . watch TV ( No )
- Model two cues , then ask Ss to repeat chorally then
individually .


- Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering in
pairs .


II : LISTEN 1. <i>Pre- listening</i> :


- Ask Ss to look at the form of the telephone message
on page 21 and set the scene “ a woman phoned the
principal of Kingston junior high school , but he was


Work in pairs


Report their answers



Practice the complete
dialogue


- Work in pairs
+ Yes , they are


+ They intend to go to the
pop concert


+ They are meeting inside
the center at 7.15


+ be going to
Listen and copy


Listen to teacher carefully
.


Work in pairs


Practice the complete
dialogue


Make similar dialogue .


Practice asking and
answering


Look at the form of the
telephone message and


listen to the scene


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

out .”


- Have Ss guess the message .
- Let Ss work in pairs


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


2. <i>While - listening</i> :


- Turn on the tape twice and ask Ss to fill in the
message , compare with their predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers after checking .
. 3. <i>Post - listening</i> :


- Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the information they
have heard


- Go around the class and help them .


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue they have
made .


III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write five things that they intend to do next
week .



2. Do exercises in the workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Guess the message
Read their predictions
Listen to tape carefully ,
compare with their
predictions .


Read their answers


Listen and copy
.


Preparing date : 22 / 09 / 2009


Unit 2: Making arrangements



<b>Period 9 Lesson 3 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about </i>
<i>Alexander Graham Bell . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , posters , pictures of Bill</i> .
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Brainstorming</b>


- Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the board


and write :


To chat with friend


 Possible answers :
- to have a message
- to call someone
- to make arrangements


- to talk to a person who lives far from
- to get information at the airport or railway


station quickly


II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the aims and some new
words to Ss .


1.Pre teach vocabulary :


- to emigrate = to go another country to live
- to transmit ( translation )


- to conduct = to carry out
- to demonstrate ( translation )
- a device ( translation )


- a deaf – mute = a person who is unable to hear and
speak .


Play games



Read their answers aloud
and copy .


Listen carefully
Listen and repeat in
chorus , then


individually .


Guess its meanings
Copy down


Play game
What is the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <i><b>What and where</b></i>


2 . T / F statements prediction :


- Hang the poster of T / F statements on the board and
ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are
true or false .


a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA


b. He worked with deaf – mute patients in a hospital
in Boston .


c. Thomas Watson was Bell,<sub>s assistant.</sub>



d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877 .
e. Bell experimented his invention at a lot of


exhibitions .


- Call on some pairs to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


III / <b>While - reading</b> :
* <i>True or false</i> :


-Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their
books to read the text , then check their prediction


Guess Answer Correction


a F He was born in Edinburgh in Scotland


b F He worked with deaf – mute patients
at Boston University


c T


d F He introduced telephone in 1876


e F He experimented with ways of


transmitting speech over a long distance



f T


- Ask some Ss to read the correct answers aloud .
* <i>Ordering</i> :


- Ask Ss to look at the exercise and read the events of
Bell,<sub>s life , then put them in the correct order .</sub>


- Have them compare with their partners
- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback


= > Alexander Graham Bell
1. Was born in Scotland
2. went to live in Canada
3. went to live in the USA


4. worked with people who could neither speak
nor hear


5. worked with Thomas Watson


6. successfully demonstrate his invention
7. invented the telephone .


- Call on some Ss to read all the correct order
sentences aloud .


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> : <b>Writing it up</b>



- Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell,<sub>s life , using </sub>


the information from the text .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front
of class .


- Correct mistakes if any and give Suggestions :
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy down their writings .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Look at the poster and
work in pairs to predict .


Read their predictions


Listen , read the text , then
check their predictions .


- Correct the false ones


Read them aloud
Do the exercise
Read their answers


Read their correct
sentences aloud


Write individually .
Compare with their
partners .


Read their writings aloud .


Preparing date : 28 / 09 / 2009


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

Unit 2: Making arrangements



<b>Period 10 lesson 4 : write</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a
<i>telephone message </i>


<i>B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , posters .... </i>
C/ <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Jumbled words</b>


<i>1. mcuestor = customer </i>
<i>2.</i> ayddmi = midday
<i>3. essgmea = message </i>
<i>4. nifurretu = furniture </i>
<i>5. rvseice = service </i>
II / <b>Pre - writing</b> :


1.Chatting :


– Talk to Ss about taking a telephone message



 Have you ever taken a message ,


 When you take a message , what should be
mentioned in the message ?


( Date , time who sent , to whom , content )
2. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- a customer = a person who comes to buy
something at a shop .


- a delivery


- stationery ( papers ,pens , pencils , rulers .. )
- to pick someone up


* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
III / <b>While - writing</b> :


1. Reading and gap filling


- Ask Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in
the message .


- Ask them to work in pairs


- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
Correct and give feed back



 Answers :


<i> A customer phoned the Thang Loi Delivery </i>
<i>Service on May 12 just before midday . She </i>
<i>wanted to speak to Mr Ha but he was out . So Mr </i>
<i>Tam took a message for Mr Ha . The customer,<sub>s </sub></i>
<i>name was Mrs . Lien and she wanted to know </i>
<i>about her furniture delivery . She wanted Mr Ha </i>
<i>to call her . She said Mr Ha could reach her at </i>
<i>8645141 after lunch . </i>


- Ask Ss to read the passage 2 to get information
and write the message .


- Let Ss write individually then share with a
partner .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers
- Correct and give feedback .


* Answers :


Thanh Cong Delivery Service
Date : June 16


Time : After midday
For : Mrs Van


Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery
order . He wanted you to call him at 8634082



Play game


Practice asking and
answering the questions


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings
Copy down


Play games


Read and do the
exercise .


Read their answers
aloud


Read the information
and write the message .


Read their answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

Taken by : Mr Toan .


- Ask Ss to write another message , using the scene
“ Tom phoned Nancy , but she was out . Lisa ,
Nancy ,<sub>s sister took a message for Nancy . Help </sub>



Lisa to write a message “


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Lisa and
Tom then , write the message .


- Let Ss work in pairs .
IV / <b>Post - writing</b> :


- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud
- Correct and give feedback


* Answers :


Date : ( ...)
Time : ( ...)
For : Nancy


Message : Tom called about playing tennis this
afternoon. He will come over to pick you up at
1.30


Taken by : Lisa
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy the message on their notebooks .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .
* <b>feedback</b> :



Write a message , using
the information .


Read the dialogue .
Work in pairs


Read their answers .


Listen and copy


Preparing date : 29 / 09 / 2009


Unit 2: Making arrangements



<b>Period 11 lesson 5 : Language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about
<i>intentions with be going to and know how to use Adverbs of place .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , posters , chalks ....
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> :


<b>Telephone transmitting</b>
II / <b>New lesson</b> :


1.Talk about intentions with going to : Introduce
<i>the form and use of going to</i>



- Form : <b>S + be going to + infinitive</b>


- Use : express an intention
Ex 1 :


- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 . They have to work
with a partner and say what the people are
going to do


- Example :


T : Nga has a movie ticket . What is she going to
do ?


S : She is going to see a movie .


Play game


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs


Read the example


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- Call on some pairs to read their sentences aloud .
- Correct and give feedback :


a. They are going fishing


b. She is going to read the new model


c. She is going to do her homework .


d. He is going to watch an action movie on TV
tonight .


e. She is going to give him a birthday present .
Ex 2 : Complete the list ( Questionnaire )
a) Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class .


- Listen and give feedback .
b) Get Ss to work in pairs


- Have some pairs demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback .


2. Adverbs of place
* Jumbled words


- Let Ss work individually , one student one word
1. tdeousi = outside


2. siiden = inside
3. hetre = there
4. erhe = here
5. stupairs = upstairs
6. wonstaird = downstairs



- Ask Ss to go to the board and write the meanings
words .


- Call on some Ss to read all the adverbs aloud .
Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles . Use each
adverb in the box once .


- Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide and seek with
his cousin , Mr Tuan “


- Let Ss work in pairs , then compare with another
pair ( at their table )


- Call on some Ss to read out the speech bubbles
- Give feedback


<i>a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is upstairs </i>
<i>b. No , he is not here . </i>


<i>c. He is not downstairs and he is not upstairs .</i>
<i>d. Perhaps , he is outside . </i>


<i>e. No , he is not there . </i>


<i>f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba. </i>


- Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences
III / <b>Homework</b> :


1.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks .


2. Write six sentences about your house , using
adverbs of place .


3. Prepare the next lesson .
* <b>Feedback</b> :


Read their complete
sentences


Work in pairs


Stick in column “You “
and Your partner


- Demonstrate in front
of class .


Work individually , one
student one word


Go to the board to write
the meanings and read
them aloud .


Listen to the scene .
Work in pairs


Read out the speech
bubbles



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

Preparing date : 01 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Period 12 lesson 1 : Getting started</b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the
<i>dialogue and use modal verbs to talk about the housework . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , cassette , pictures ...
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Kim,<sub>s game ( Getting started</sub></b><sub> )</sub>
- Show 6 pictures to Ss and ask them to look at 6
pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to


remember the verbs in the pictures as many as
possible


- Which team remembering more verbs is the
winner.


 Answer :


a. Wash dishes / do the washing up
b. Make the bed


c. Sweep the floor
d. Cook



e. Tidy up


f. Feed the chicken


II / <b>Presentation</b> : Introduce the topic of the
passage and some new words


1. Pre- teach Vocabulary :
- a steamer


- a cup board
- a sauce pan
- chore
- a sink


* <b>Checking techniques</b> : What and where


- Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam and
his mother , Mrs Vui .


- Ask Ss to complete the list of the things Nam has
to do .


- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books
and read their complete sentences :


<i><b> - cook dinner .</b></i>


<i><b> Nam has to - go to the market to buy fish and </b></i>


<i><b>vegetables.</b></i>


<i><b> - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask </b></i>
<i><b>her to meet his mother at grandma</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s house </sub></b></i>
-> Form :


<b>Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive </b>


Model : What do you have to do ?
I must do the washing up .


Play game


Listen and copy down .


Repeat in chorus and
individually


Guess its meanings and
copy


Play game
Listen carefully


Listen to the tape while
looking at their books .


Read their sentences
they have completed



Copy and give examples


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

-> Use the picture cues drill :
a. do the washing up


b. make the bed
c. sweep the floor
d. cook dinner
e. tidy my room
f. feed the chickens


- Call on some Ss to practice in front of class
* Have Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs .
III / <b>Production</b> :


- Ask Ss to write the lists of the things they have
to do on Sundays .


<i>Beginning with : On Sunday morning , I have to </i>
tidy my room ...


- Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of
class.


- Correct mistakes if any and ask them to copy .
IV<b>/ Homework</b> :


1. Learn by heart all new words they have
learnt .



2. Do their exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Practice in pairs


Read the dialogue in
pairs .


Write individually


Demonstrate their
writings


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 02 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Period 13 Lesson 2: Speak </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the
<i>prepositions of places to talk about the positions in the house .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Pictures , chalks , ....
C / <b>Procedure :</b>


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Kim,<sub>sgame</sub></b>
- Devide the class into 2 teams



- Show the picture of a chicken to Ss .


- Ask them to study the things in the picture
- Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down
as many things as they can remember .


- Which team having more things win games .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

II / <b>Pre - Speaking</b> :


- Ask Ss the positions of the items in the pictures .
Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge .
Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl .
Where is the flowers ? They are on the table .
Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bwl of
fruit .


Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above
the counter .


Where are the knives ? They are on the wall ,
under the cupboard .


Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter ,
next to the bowl of fruit .


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .


III / <b>While - speaking</b> :



- Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the
position of each item


Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove .
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class.


- Give feedback :


+ The sink is next to the stove .


+ The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter .
+ The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard .
+ The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and
the dish rack .


+ The clock is on the wall , above the fridge .
+ The flowers are on the table .


- Ask them to read all the suggested sentences
aloud .


IV <b>/ Post - speaking :</b>


- Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new
furniture for her living room , but she can
not decide where to put it . You should help
her to arrange the furniture”



- Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about
their ideas .


 Ask Ss to practice speaking :
- If they agree , they may use :


Ok


You are right


- If they disagree , they may use :


No , I think we ,<sub>d better / ought to put ...</sub>


I think it should be ...
Example :


- Let us put the clock on the wall , between the
shelf and the picture .


- OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the
stereo on the shelf …..


- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
V / <b>Homework :</b>


1. Describe their living room or bedroom .
2. Do exercise in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .



Practice asking and
answering about the
positions of each item .


Work in pairs


Read all the sentences
aloud .


Listen carefully .


Copy down


Read the examples


Practice speaking .


Listen and copy .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

* <b>Feedback</b> :


Preparing date : 04 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Period 14 lesson 3 : Listen </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to identify the right
<i>item by listening . </i>



B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Cassette , textbooks , chalks , ....
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Bingo</b>


- Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5
things you can eat .


- Prepare a list of food . Then call out each
word in a loud voice .


- Ss listen to the teacher carefully . If anyone
has the same things , they cross them out .
The first person crossing out all 5 things
shouts “ Bingo “ and wins the game .


 Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef ,
cake , candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice ,
ham , peas ...


II / <b>Pre - listening</b> :
* Predictions :


- Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they
use to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


III / <b>While - listening</b> :



- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask them to check
their predictions .


- Give feedback
a. Fired Rice
b. Pan


c. Garlic and green peppers
d. Ham and peas .


- Turn on the tape once more to check the answers
again .


IV <b>/ Post - listening :</b> <i><b>Mapped dialogue</b></i>


- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to
make a dialogue by listening the tape again .


Play game


Look at their books and
guess 4 things , they use
to cook the “ Special
Chinese Fried Rice “
- Read their predictions


Listen to the tape
carefully to check their
predictions .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<i>Lan : Can I help ..., Mom ? </i>


<i>Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook ...</i>
<i> Use the big pan please .</i>


<i>Lan : ...?</i>


<i>Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot and then </i>
<i>fry the garlic and the green peppers . </i>


<i>Lan : ...? </i>


<i>Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice and s </i>
<i>teaspoon of salt in . </i>


<i>Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ... . </i>


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in
front of class .


- Correct pronunciations if any .
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy down the dialogue in their notebooks .
2. Do exercise ... in workbook .


3 . Prepare the next lesson .


Practice in pairs to make


a dialogue .


Practice in front of class


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 05 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Period 15 Lesson 4 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the
<i>safety precautions in the house and use Why- because </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , Cassette , pictures , realias ...
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Brainstorming</b>


 Possible answers :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- dug


- electricity
- boiling water
- fire


- gas
- knife



- Ask them to copy down .


II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the
passage reading and some new words to Ss
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- a precaution = sự phòng ngừa , sự đè phòng
- a socket ( realia )


- a match ( realia )
- an object = vật , đồ vật
- safety (n ) = sự an toàn
- to destroy = phá huỷ
- to injure ( situation )


* <b>Checking : Slap the board</b>


2. True / false statements predictions


- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is
true , which is false .


<b>Statements</b> <b>Guess</b> <b>Key</b>


1. It is safe to leave medicine
around the house .


2. Drugs can look like candy .
3. A kitchen is a suitable place


to play .


4. Playing with one match can
not start a fife .


5. Putting a knife into an
electrical socket is dangerous .
6. Young children do not
understand that many house
hold objects are dangerous .


F
T
F
F
T
T


- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


III / <b>While - reading</b> :
1. Reading the text :


- Turn on the tape , Ss look at poster to check their
prediction.


- Have them correct the statements which are false
1. It is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboards .
3. A kitchen is dangerous place to play .



4. Playing with one match can cause fire.


Play game


Write down


Listen to the topic .


Listen and repeat in
chorus and individually
Guess its meaning s and
copy


Play game in 2 teams
Read and predict


Read their predictions
aloud .


Listen to the tape . look
at the poster to check
their predictions .


- Correct the false ones .


<b>Danger in the </b>
<b>home for </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud ( 2 Ss )


2. Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to find out the answers of
these questions .


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .


- Give feedback


a. Because children often try to eat and drink them
b Because the kitchen is a dangerous place to place
c. Because playing with one match can cause fire .
d. Because children often try to put something into
electrical sockets and electricity can kill .


e. Because the dangerous objects can injure or kill
children .


IV / <b>Post - Reading: Discussion </b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups , discussing about the
topic .


1. Safety precautions in the street .
2. Safety precautions at school .
V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Copy down the answers above .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


- Read the aloud


Practice asking and
answering the questions
Work in groups to
discuss about the topic .
- Demonstrate in front
of class.


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 07 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Period 16 : lesson 5 : write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a
<i>description of a room in their house . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , chalks , board ...


<b>C / </b>Procedure :


I / <b>Warm up</b> <b>: Chatting</b>


<i>( Asking something about the room on page 32 )</i>
1. Which room is this ?



2. What is this ? / Where is it ?


II / <b>Pre - writing</b> : Introduce the aims and some
new words to Ss :


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- folder


- beneath
- dish rack
- lighting fixture


* <b>Checking</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>


2. Reading


- Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa,<sub>sroom , </sub>


then ask some comprehension questions
a. What is there on the left of the room ?
b. Where is the bookshelf ?


c. What is there on the right side of the room ?
d. Where is the wardrobe ?


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct and give feedback :


Play game



Listen and copy the title
of the lesson .


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings and
copy .


Play game


Read the description and
practice asking and


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

a. There is a desk on the left of the room .
b. The bookshelf is above the desk .


c. There is a window on the right side of the room .
d. The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite
the desk .


- Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa,<sub>s </sub>


room aloud .


III / <b>While - writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to describe Hoa,<sub>s kitchen , using the given</sub>


cues .



- Ask Ss to share with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in
front of class .


- Correct the mistakes from some descriptions if
any .


- Give feedback


<i>This is Hoa,<sub>s kitchen . </sub></i>


<i>There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the </i>
<i>room . </i>


<i>Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven</i>
<i>On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and </i>
<i>next to the sink is a towel rack . </i>


<i>The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right </i>
<i>of the window and beneath the selves . </i>


<i>On the selves and on the counter beneath the </i>
<i>window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . </i>
<i>In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and </i>
<i>four chairs . </i>


<i>The lighting fixture is above the table , and </i>



<i>directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with </i>
<i>flowers . </i>


- Call on some Ss to read the completed
descriptions aloud .


IV / <b>Post- writing</b> : <b>Speaking </b>


- Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room /
living room / kitchen .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in
front of class .


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write a description of their living room .
2. Do exercises( ...)in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .
* <b>Feedback</b> :


answering the questions


Read the description
aloud .


Work individually
Compare with their
friends



Demonstrate their
writings in front of class


Read the completed
writing aloud .
Practice speaking .


Demonstrate in front of
class .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

Preparing date : 08 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Period 17 : lesson 6 : Language focus</b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the


<i>Reflexive Pronouns , modal verbs to talk about the house work and know how to use </i>
<i>Why - Because . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , boards , chalks ...
C / <b>Procedure :</b>


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Brainstorming</b>


- tidy up


- do our homework


Things you - cook


can do - water flower
- clean the floor
- repair the machine
- fix the TV set
Things you - paint the house
can not do -


- Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “
- Listen and correct mistakes if any
II / <b>Language focus</b> :


1. Reflexive pronouns


- Set the scene “ You do your homework and no
one helps you . What do you say ? “


I do my homework myself .
-> Explain the reflexive Pronouns
- > <b>Form</b> : We use I with myself
You ... yourself / yourselves


He ...himself She ...herself
We ...ourselves They ... themselves
It ... itself


- Emphasis pronouns : Used to emphasize a person
or a thing .



Eg : She cut herself .


John saw himself in the mirror .


 Complete the dialogue :


- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive
pronouns or emphasis pronouns .


- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
- Give feedback :


a. himself b. ourselves c. myself / yourself
d. himself / herself / themselves e. yourself .
- Ask them to practice the complete dialogue .
2. Modal verbs


- Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she
failed her English test . What do you say to advise
her ? “


“ You should study harder “


 Another word for “ should “ : Ought to
Ought to + Infinitive


- Ex 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the
pictures ( Language focus 2 )


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .


- Give feedback :


Play game


Talk the things you can
do / can not do


Listen to the scene and
answer the questions .


Write down and give
examples


- Work in pairs to
complete the dialogue


- Practice speaking


Listen and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

a. I failed my English test .
You ought to study harder
b. You ought to get up earlier .


c. You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables .
d. You ought to see a dentist .


* <b>Checking</b> : Noughts and crosses :
His tooth /



ache Hoa / late My room / untidy
The floor /


dirty Bao / overweight She / thin
My English /


bad


Hergrades /
bad


The washing
machine / not
work


 Using “ Should “ to play game .


Ex 1 : Look at the pictures . Complete the dialogue
, Use Must or Have to and the verbs in the box :
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue :
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class.


- Give feedback


1. must / have to tidy
2. have to / must dust
3. must / have to sweep
4. must / have to clean
5. have to / must empty


6. must / have to feed
III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Do exercise 4 ( language focus 4 )
2. Copy all the exercises above .
3. Prepare the test .


 <b>Feedback</b> :


- Practice in front of
class.


Play game


Work in pairs


-> Demonstrate in front
of class .


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 14 / 10 / 2009


Period 18 :

<b>Consolidation</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss can remind the use of tense & the main Grammar to practice


<b>II. Contents:</b>



Gram: - Present simple tenses
- Enough


- be going to
- Modal verbs
- Reflexive pros


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b> Ts’ & Ss’ book , work book


<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher s & Students activities</b>’ ’ <b>Contents</b>


1.
Warm up


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

2.
Presentation


3.
Practice


4.
Production


? The use and form of the tense.


? The position of adverbs?



? Repent the use form of tense
? Make sentences


? The use of it
? Give examples


? Make sentence


? Repeat the use of must, have to,
ought to




- Correct. If necessary
? play lucky number
(in 4 groups)


Have Ps read in chorus.


<b>I. Present simple tense</b>


- <i><b>Use</b></i>


- Form: S + am/is/ are + (o)
v/ v_s, es


- E.g.: I am a teacher.
She plays soccer


Adverbs: always, often….



<b>II. Past simple tense</b>


- use


form: S+ v- past + (o)


E.g.: I was at home yesterday
evening


She went to HCM city last year
- Adverbs: last, ago , yesterday…


<b>III. Enough:</b>


- Before nouns & after adjectives
-E.g.: there are enough chairs for
us to sit


- The tea is cold enough to drink.


<b>IV. Be going to</b>


- For intention and prediction
- E.g.: we are going to have a day
off next week


- The wind is strong the door is
going to slam.



<b>V. Modal verbs</b>


- must/ have to for obligation
- ought to for advice


<b>VI. Reflexive pronoun</b>


I - myself


You - yourself/yourselves
We - ourselves


They - themselves
She - herself
He - himself
It - itself


5. Homework: Ask Ps to study harder for the next exam.


<b> The end </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

Preparing date : 16 / 10 / 2009


<b>Period 19 </b>

<b> </b>

witten Test 1



A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do </i>
<i>the test well . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Papers , chalks and boards . </i>
C / <b>Matrix :</b>



<b>Contents</b> <b>R</b>ecognizing Understanding <b>Using</b>


<b> Total</b>
result selfthinking result selfthinking result selfthinking


<b>Phonetics</b> <b>5 </b>


<b>0.4</b> <b>5 2.0</b>


<b>2 .language </b>


<b>focus</b> 10 - 0,3 <b>10 3.0</b>


<b>3 . reading</b> <b>5 0.5</b> <b>5 2.5</b>


<b>4. writing</b> <b>5 2.5</b>


<b>5 2.5</b>
<b> total</b> <b>10 3.0 10 4.5</b> <b>5 2.5</b> <b>25</b>


<b> 10.0</b>


<b>D / T</b>

est



I – Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.
1. A - – <b>th</b>at B - mo<b>th</b>er C - fa<b>th</b>er D <b>th</b>ink 2.


A - friendl<b>y</b> B -fr<b>y</b>ing pan C - beaut<b>y</b> D - cit<b>y</b>



3. A - f<b>o</b>r B - y<b>o</b>ur C - now D - m<b>o</b>rning
4. A - want<b>ed</b> B - stopp<b>ed</b> C - work<b>ed</b> D - watch<b>ed</b>


5. A - l<b>i</b>ke B - n<b>i</b>ce C - Fr<b>i</b>day D - c<b>i</b>ty


.Your answers : 1……….; 2……….;3………….;4………..;5……….
II – Choose the best answer to complete the sentences .


1. The sun………….in the east and …………in the west.


A. rise / set B . sets /rises C . rises / sets D . rises / set
2. Last year, we………….in Nha Trang with our grandparents.


A . lived B . lives C . live D . are living


3. What ………..you ………yesterday?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

4 . I………to go to the market .


A. has B. must C . should D . have


5. Can I speak ……….Nga please ? This is Hoa


A . from B . and C . with D . to


6. Nam had to cook dinner…………because his mother was home late .


A. heself B . himself C . himselves D . myself
7. Nam must……….toschool on foot .



A . to go B . goes C . go D . going


8. Ba is fifteen years old . He is ………to drive a car .


A. old enough B . not old enough C . not enough old D . enough old
9. You………….to go to school yourself.


A. must B . should C . has D . ought


10. What does your father look………….? – He is short and fat.


A .at B . like C . for D . in .


1……..;2…....; 3…...;4.……;5………;6……;7……;8………;9………;10……
III – Read the information in the table and answer the questions below .


Name : Tran Van Nam


Appearance : fat , short , short black hair
Characters : friendly, sociable , helpful
Address : 26 Tran Phu Street, Ha Noi
Family : mother , father , sister – Nga
Friends : Hoa and Lan


1 . What is his name ?


………..


2 . Where does he live ?



………..


3 . What is he like ?


……….


4 . How many people are there in his


family ?...
5 . Who are his friends ?


……….


IV – Write the answer about you .


1 . What is your name ? ……….


2. How old are you ? ……….


3 . What do you do ? ………..


4. What do you look like ?


………


5. How many people are ther in your family ?


………





<b> </b>

The end



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>



Preparing date : 16 / 10 / 2009


<b>Period 20 : </b>

<b> </b>

<b>test correction</b>



<b>I / Aims and Objectives : </b>By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:
-Get the correct answers of the test.


- Understand more about how to do a test.


<b>II</b> / <b>Correction</b>


1 . Pre-correcting .


a. Making a few remarks on the test.
b. Giving the paper back .


2. While correcting .
a. giving the answers.
Exercise 1: 0,4 .5=2,0 marks


1 2 3 4 5
D B C A D
Exercise 2 : 0,3 .10 = 3,0 marks


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


C A B D D B C B D B
Exercise 3 : 0,5 . 5 = 2,5 marks .


1- His name is Tran Van Nam


2- He live at 26 Tran Phu Street , Ha Noi .


3- He is friendly , sociable and has short black hair .
4- There are four people in his family .


5- His friends are Hoa and Lan .
Exercise 4 : 0,5 . 5 = 2,5 marks .


1 . My name is …………..


2. I am ……….years old .
3. I am a student .


4. I am ………


5 . There are ……….people in my family .
3 . Post- correcting .


- Focus on how to do a test .
- Get the test back


4 . Consolidation :


- Preparing for unit 4 .



The end


<b> </b>



<b> </b>



<b> </b>

Preparing date : 18 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b> Period 21 lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell the activities </i>
<i>people used to do in the past . </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Getting started </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and write the names of the
things that do not belong to the past .


* Answers :
- The TV
- The radio
- The mobile
- The light fixture



- Modern clothing / school uniforms
II / <b>Pre - reading</b> :


1. Pre- teach vocabulary
- to look after = to take care of
- Equipment (n) - example


- a folk tale : Tam Cam is a folk tale
- Traditional ( adj )


- a great grandma (n)


* Checking : <b>What and where </b>
2. T / F statements prediction


- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true
or false .


Statements Guess Key


1. Nga is used to live on farm


2. Nga ,<sub>s grandma did not go to school</sub>


.


3. She has an easy and happy life
when she was young .


4. There was not any modern


equipment at her time .


5. “ The lost shoe “ is a short story


F
T
F
T
F
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on
the board .


III / <b>While - reading</b> :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their books to read
the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to check
their predictions


- Ask them to correct the false statements .
1. Grandma used to love on farm


3. She had a hard life .
5. It is an old folk tale .
* <b>Comprehension</b> :


- Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering
questions


- Give feedback



a. She used to live on a farm .


b. Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to
look after her younger brothers and sisters .


c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and wash
the clothes .


d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great
father used to tell stories .


e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale “ The lost
shoe “


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions .


* <b>Fact or opinion</b>


- Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide
which is a fact and which is a pinion .


<b>Statements</b> <b>Fact</b> <b>Opinion</b>


a. I used to live on a farm . X


Play game


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .


Guess its meanings and
copy down


Play game


Work in groups


- Read their predictions
Listen to the tape and
look at their books to
check their predictions
- Correct the false ones


Practice asking and
answering the
questions .


Read the statements and
decide which is a fact
and which is a opinion .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

b. There was not any electricity .
c. Mom had to do everything without
the help of modern equipment .
d. My father used to tell us stories
e. The best one was the lost shoe .
f. Traditional stories are great .


X
X


X


X
X
- Give feedback


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> : <b>Survey</b>


Did you use to ...? Name
- Get up late .


- Ride bicycle too fast .
- Go to school .


- Eat too much candy .


- Forget to do your homework


- Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to check “
Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too fast ...? “
- Write it down .


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write the result of their survey .
2. Learn by heart new words .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Practice in groups
Demonstrate in front of


class .


Listen and copy .


<b> </b> Preparing date : 19 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b>Period 22 lesson 2 : Speak & listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives </b>: <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk </i>
<i>about the things they used to do . </i>


- to understand the main idea of a story by listening .
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , word cards for drilling</i> .
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Jumbled words</b>
- rieletcicty = Electricity
- menttaenterin = Entertainment
- rkmaet = Market


- permasuekt = Supermarket
II / <b>Pre - speaking</b> :


 Recall the conversation between Nga and her
grandma , then ask “ Where did Nga,<sub>s grandma </sub>


always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm .
- Ask : “ Another word for <i>always lived</i> “ .



Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and answer.
“ Where did Nga ,<sub>s grandma use to live ? “ </sub>


She used to live on a farm .


 Expressing a past habit , or an action usually
happened in the past .


 Practice


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the cues above .


III / <b>While - speaking</b> :


- Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs .
- Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “ USED TO “
to talk about the actions in the past , using these ideas
below :


1. Where did they live in the past ? And now ?


2. How did they travel ? 3. What is about the electricity
4. What is about their life / work ?


5. Did children use to go to school ?


Play games



Practice reading the
conversation and answer
the questions


Listen and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

6. What is about their entertainment ?


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback .


* <i>Suggested answers</i> :


1. People used to live in small houses . Now they live in
big houses and buildings.


2. People used to walk . Now they can go by cars or
motorbikes .


3. Now , there is electricity everywhere .


4. People used to work hard all the time . Now they
have a lot of time for entertainment .


5. Most children used to stay at home . Now , they all go
to school .


6. Children used to play traditional games such as hide
and seek , skip rope ... outdoors . Now , they have a lot
of modern games – video games .



IV / <b>Post - speaking :</b> <b>Write it up</b>


- Ask Them to write a complete writing about the
difference of the life in the past and now.


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Correct common mistakes .


II / <b>Pre - listening</b> : Introduce the topic of the listening
task


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- Foolish (a) = ngÊ ngÈn , ngèc nghiÕch
- greedy ( a) = tham lam


- Gold (n) ( realia )


- to lay -> laid – laid ( Picture )


- amazement (n) = ngạc nhiên , vui nhộn
* <b>Checking</b> : <b>What and where</b>
2. Prediction :


- Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story .
- Have them look at four titles and guess which is the
most suitable to the story .


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write


them on the board .


III / <b>While - listening</b> :
1. Checking the prediction


- Turn on the tape twice and ask them to check their
predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their results and give feed back
: “ Don,<sub>t be foolish and greedy “</sub>


- Turn on the tape once more to check their results
again . 2. Find out the verbs in the story :


- Ask Ss what tense is used in the story ( Simple past
tense )


- Have Ss listen again and try to write as many verbs as
possible . The student who writes more verbs get good
marks .


- Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud .


- Give feedback: we<i>nt / discovered / laid / shouted / </i>
<i>finished / could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / </i>
<i>decided .</i>


- Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs.
IV / <b>Post - listening</b> :



V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write about the things you used to do last year .
<i>Beginning</i> : Last year , I used to get up late . Now , I get
up very early and do morning exercises . ... ... “


2. Do exercise in workbook .


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of
class


Work individually .
Listen and copy .
Listen and copy


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually
Copy down


Play game


Work in groups to
predict .


Read their predictions
aloud .


Listen to the tape and


check their predictions
Read their results and
write down .


Listen and find out the
verbs in the tape
Read them aloud .


Give the infinitives of
these verbs .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

3. Prepare the next lesson .


Preparing date : 23 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b>Period 23 Lesson 3 : Read </b>



A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand and retell </i>
<i>the story - The lost shoe .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Text book , word cards for drilling , cassette ...</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Brainstorming</b>


Name some folks tales that you have read .


 Possible answers :



- Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo )
- Tấm cám


- Hoµng tử Cóc ( The frog Prince )
- Đôi hài 7 dặm ( Seven mile shoes )


- Bạch tuyết và bảy chú lùn ( Snow white and 7 dwarfs )


II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt
- upset (a) = worried


- fairy (n) = truỵện cổ tích
- magical (a) -> magically (adv)
- rag (n) ( realia )


- to fall in love with = yªu


- immediately (adv ) = ngay lËp tøc
* <b>Checking</b> : <b>ROR</b>


2. T / F statements predictions


- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict


Statements Guess Key



1. Little Pea,<sub>s father is poor farmer </sub>


2. Her father got married again after his
wife died .


3. Her new mother was beautiful and nice
to her .


4. She worked hard all day .


5. She did not have new clothes to take part
in the festival .


T
T
F
T
F


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board


III / <b>While - reading</b> :
1. Checking the predictions :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their
text books to check their predictions and correct the
false ones .



- Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to her .
- Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes.
- Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct mistakes if
any .


Play games


Copy some names of the
stories in English .


Listen and copy


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings and
copy .


Play games


Work in groups


Read their predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

2. Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the questions
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering .
- Listen and give feedback


a. She was a poor farmer ,<sub>s daughter . </sub>



b. She made her do the chores all day .


c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and
magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes .
d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe fitted
her .


e. Ss answer themselves .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.


3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words from
the story .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with suitable
words from the story .


- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences
aloud .


- Give feedback
a. farmer b. died


c. used d. marry / choose
e. clothes f. lost


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> :


 Retell the story



- Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in details
( They can look at the statements in the gap filling
exercise and add more )


- Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of class .
- Correct mistakes if any


V / <b>Homework</b> :
1. Rewrite the story .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and check their
predictions .


Read their results and
correct the false ones .


Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions


Work in pairs to


complete the sentences
Read their complete
sentences .



Listen and copy .
Work in pairs to retell
the story in details .
Demonstrate in front of
class .


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 25 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b> Period 24 lesson 4 : Write </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Simple Past
<i>Tense to write a folk tale .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards .
C / <b>Procedure :</b>


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting</b>


- Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories
1. Do you want to read imaginary stories ?
2. Name some of them


3. Which story do you like best ?


4. Have you ever read the story “ how the tigers got
his stripes “ ?



II / <b>Pre - writing</b> : Introduce the aims of the writing
and some new words .


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n
- a stripe (n) ( realia )


Play game


Listen and copy
Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

- a straw ( n) ( realia )


- a servant (n) : ngời phục vụ , đầy tớ
- to graze ( picture )


- to escape : trèn tho¸t


- to light – lit – lighted ( mime )
* <b>Checking</b> : <b>Matching </b>


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1. wisdom a. trốn thoát
2. a stripe b. đờng sọc
3. a straw c. ăn cỏ , gặm cỏ
4. a servant d. trí khơn



5. graze e. rơm rạ


6. escape f . ®Çy tí


- Ask Ss to come to the board to match items on the
left with those on the right by drawing a line


connecting the story .
* Reading :


- Ask Ss to read and complete the story .


- Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the
box .


- Have them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to
fill in the blanks .


- Call on them to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback


1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left
5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped
+ Comprehension questions :


1. where was the man ?


2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger
appeared ?



3. What did the tiger want to know ?


4. What did he do before going home ? Why ?
5. What did he do when he returned ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions above .


III / <b>While - writing</b> :


- Get Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to imagine to be
a man in order to write the story )


+ Notice : Change


The man -> I / His -> My


- Ask Ss to work individually , then share with their
partners and correct mistakes .


- Take some writings to correct in front of the class.
- Give suggested answers :


IV / <b>Post - writing</b> : <b>Telling the story </b>


- Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the
role of the tiger . Team B plays the role of the
buffalo



- Ask them to work in team , telling the story
Notice :


- Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I
- Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > I
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write the story again , imagine you are :
* The tiger


Guess its meanings
and copy


Work individually .


Read the verbs in the
box and say the
meanings of them .
Read the complete
story .


Work in pairs to
practice asking and
answering the
questions .


Write the story
individually .


Demonstrate in front


of class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

* The buffalo


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 27 / 10 / 2009


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b>Period 25</b> <b>Lesson 5 : language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use


<i>prepositions of time and Used to ( to talk about the action which always happens in the</i>
<i>past ) and further practice in the Past Simple Tense .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Text books , boards , chalk <i>…….</i>
C / <b>Procedure :</b>


I / <b>Warm up</b> :


<b>Matching </b>


A B Key


1. In a. January 1.a / d



2. On b. 3 p m 2. c / e


3.At c. Wednesday 3. b / f


4. Between d. November 1997 4. f
5. After / Before e. July 2nd <sub>5. b</sub>


f. 7 a m and 9 am
- Call on some Ss to read aloud each phrase .


- Explain the uses of some prepositions of time and
ask Ss to do Exercises


II / <b>Practice </b>


1. Ex 3 / page 44


- Ask Ss to work individually , then compare with
their partners .


- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences
aloud .


- Give feedback


<i>a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before</i>
2. Ex 4 : Complete the dialogue :


- Have Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs , using


USED TO with the verbs “ Live – Stay – Have –
be “ to complete the dialogue between Nga and
Hoa .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .


<i>0. used to stay </i>
<i>1. used to have </i>
<i>2. used to be </i>
<i>3. used to live </i>


III / <b>Further practice</b> :


Play game


Read the correct
phrases aloud


Work individually
.Compare with their
partners .


Read the complete
sentences aloud .
Copy down .


Work in pairs


Practice the dialogue .



Play game
( Whole class )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>Deliberate mistakes</b>


- Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to listen
carefully and try to find out the mistake . When they
hear a mistake , they stand up and say No then
correct it .


Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday
Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday .


a. My father used to play football when he has
spare time .


b. She used live in Ha noi .


c. My parents will arrive in 3 o,<sub>lock .</sub>


d. He was born in June the third .
IV / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Do exercises (1,2) in textbook .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


 <b>Feedback</b> :



Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 29 / 10 / 2009


<b>unit 5 Study habits</b>



<b> Period 26: Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the </i>
<i>dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Text books , cassette , chalks</i> ..
C <b>/ Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Net work </b>


- Ask Ss to write as many subjects as they can on the


blackboard Work in groups to play


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

 Possible answers :


Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature /
history .


- Lead in the new lesson by Chatting
II / <b>Pre - reading : </b>


- What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ?
- What subject do you like best ? / Why ?


- How often do you have maths ? / Literature..?
1. Pre- teach vocabulary :


- a report card ( realia )
- pronunciation ( mime )
- to improve ( situation )
- to be proud of = tu hao


- to try one,<sub>s best = co gang het suc </sub>


* <b>Checking</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>
2. T / F statements predictions


- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true
or false .


Statements Guess Key


1. Tim was out when his mother


called him . F


2. Tim,<sub>s mother met his teacher at </sub>


school . F


3. Tim,<sub>s report is poor .</sub> <sub>F</sub>


4. Tim needs to improve his Spanish



grammar T


5. Tim promised to try his best in


learning Spanish . T


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


III / <b>While - reading</b> :


- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books , then
read the dialogue to check their predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their results .
- Give feedback :


- Ask Ss to correct false statements .
1. Tim was in the living room / at home
2. his report is excellent


3. He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation .
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of
class .


- Listen and correct their pronunciation if any .
* Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering


the questions .


- Give feedback .
a. She is Tim,<sub>s teacher . </sub>


Read the answers aloud .
Chat the questions .


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Copy down


Play game


Work individually


Read their predictions
aloud .


Listen and read the
dialogue to check their
predictions .


Correct false ones .
Read them aloud .
Practice the dialogue in
pairs .


Work in pairs to practice


asking and answering
the questions .


Open pairs


<b>Subjects at </b>
<b>school</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

b. She gave Tim,<sub>s mother his report card . </sub>


c. He worked really hard .


d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish
pronunciation .


e. She gave him a dictionary


- Ask them to practice in open pairs .
IV / <b>Post - reading</b> : <b>Survey </b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each other
the question “ What subject do you need to improve ? “
and they have to write the names and the subjects that
their friends answer :


Name What subject


Lan


………….



History


………..


- Ask Ss who need to improve the same subjects work in
group and discuss how to improve .


V / <b>Homework :</b>


1. Write the way how to improve the subject that they
are not good at .


2. Prepare the next lesson .


Work in groups


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : o1 / 11 / 2009


<b>unit 5 Study habits</b>



<b>Period 27: lesson 2 : Speak & listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their study </i>
<i>habits . </i>- <i> to listen for specific information to fill in a report card . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster …</i>
C / <b>Procedure :</b>



I <b>/ Warm up : Brainstorming</b>


- Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .
* Possible answers :


- Speak English to friends in class


- Watch English TV - Do grammar exercises
- Read English stories


- Read English newspapers / magazines
- Listen to the English radio program




II / <b>Pre - speaking</b> : Introduce the topic of the
speaking . - Call on some Ss to read the possible
answers above and copy down .


- Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes.
III <b>/ While - speaking</b>


* Model : <i><b>Lan said she did her homework after dinner</b></i>
<i><b> He / she said </b><b>………</b></i>


Work in groups to play
games .


Read all the ways of


improving English .


Copy in their
notebooks .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- Call on some pairs to read the model
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
- Correct mistakes if any<b> . </b>


<b>IV / Post - speaking</b> :


- Ask Ss to write with information above .


Eg : Lan ,<sub>s elder brother helps him with his homework . </sub>


- Call on some Ss to read their writings .


II / <b>Pre - listening</b> : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words :


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- behavior (n) = cach cu sw


- A participant (n) = nguoi tham gia


- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) = hai long
- cooperation (n) = hop tac



- attendance (n) =


- to appreciate = danh gia cao
* <b>Checking</b> : <b>What and where </b>
2. Prediction :


- Ask Ss to look at Nga,<sub>s report and predict the missing </sub>


information and then compare with their partners .
a. day present (1) b. Day absent (2)
c. Behavior – participant (3) d. Listening (4)
e. Speaking (5) f. Reading (6)
g. Writing (7)


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .


III / <b>While - listening</b> :
1. Listen :


- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction .
- Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback .
1. 87 days present 2. 5 days absent
3. participation : Spanish pronunciation


4. Listening : Comprehension


5. Speaking : A 6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B
2. Comprehension questions :



- Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,<sub>s report </sub>


card .


1. Who are Nga,<sub>s parents ?</sub>


2. What is Nga,<sub>s teacher</sub>,<sub>s name ? </sub>


3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?
4. What are the comments ?


5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B CD ?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs to
answer the questions .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .


IV / <b>Post - listening</b> : <b>Survey</b>


Questions You Your


partner


1. When do you do your homework ?
2. Who helps you with your homework ?
3. How much time do you spend on
Maths / English / History / Literature ?
4. Which subject do you need to
improve ?



5. What do you do to improve your
English?


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners questions
and taking notes of the answers .


- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what they


Listen and read the
model , then copy
Work in pairs


Practice in front of class.
Work individually .
Read their writings
Listen and copy .
Listen and repeat in
chorus and individually .
Copy down .


Play game


Predict and compare
with their partners .


Report their predictions .
Listen to the tape and
check their predictions
Read their results .



Work in pairs tom
practice asking and
answering the
questions .


Practice asking and
answering the questions
and report their survey .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

have known about their partners,<sub> study . </sub>


- Correct mistakes if any .
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they have
found out .


2. Do exercises in workbook .


.


Preparing date : 02 / 11 / 2009


<b>unit 5 Study habits</b>



<b>Period 28 Lesson 4 : Read </b>



A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the
<i>text and get specific information .</i>



B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbooks , cassette , chalks<i>….</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting </b>


1. Do you like English ?


2. How many new words do you try to learn a day ?
3. What do you do when you read a new words ?
4. How do you learn / remember new words ?
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .


- Correct and lead in the new lesson .


II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the
reading passage and some new words .


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- Mother tongue ( example )
- to underline ( example )
- to highlight ( example )
- to come across ( synonym )
- to stick ( mime )


* <b>Checking</b> : <b>Slap the board</b>


2 . Brainstorming



- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways
how a language learner can learn new words .


* Possible answers :
- Learn by heart


- Translate it into mother tongue


- Write each word on one piece of paper and put it
into the pocket to learn whenever


- Learn through example sentences


- Write it on small piece of paper and stick
everywhere in the house …….


III / <b>While - reading</b> :
1. True / False statements


- Ask Ss to read the statements , then read the text
and decide which is true and which is false .


Practice asking and
answering the question


Listen and copy .


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Copy down .



Play games
Work in pairs


Report and copy the
answers .


Work individually


<i>Ways language </i>
<i>learners learn </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

( Page 50 )


- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback
a. F b. T c . F d . T


* Reading :


- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud .
2. Comprehension questions


- Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some Pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions


- Give feedback


a. No . They learn words in different ways .



b. Because they help them to remember the use of
new words .


c. They write examples , put the words and their
meanings on stickers , underline or highlight them .
d. They may think they can not do so . Instead , they
learn only important words .


e. Revision is necessary in learning words .
f. Learners should try different ways of learning
words t find out what is the best .


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> :


 Survey


- Ask Ss to work in groups to interview one another
and tick the ways they have used to learn new words


<b>Ways of learning words </b> <b>Lan Hoa ...</b>


1. Make a list of words , their
meanings and learn them by
heart .


2. Write sample sentences with
new words


3. Stick new words somewhere
in the house .



4. Underline or highlight the
words .


5. Read stories in English .
6. Learn words through songs .


- Call on Ss to report about their groups .


Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words ….
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write the ways of learning words that you think
are the best for you .


2. Prepare the next lesson .


Read the text aloud .


Practice asking and
answering the
questions in pairs .


Work in groups .


Copy down .


Preparing date : 02 / 11 / 2009


<b> unit 5 Study habits</b>




<b>Period 29 : Lesson 5 : Write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know the format
of a friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend .


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , chalks , boards ….
C <b>/ Procedure</b> :


I / Warm up : <b>Chatting </b>


1. Have you ever written to someone ?
2. To whom do you usually write ?
3. What do you often write about ?
- Lead in new lesson .


Play games


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

II / <b>Pre - writing</b> : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation )
- Enjoyable (adj ) = vui thu , thich thu
- to celebrate = ki niem


-> celebration (n)


* <b>Checking: Rub out and remember </b>



2. Ordering


- Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct
order .


a. Opening d. Body of the letter
b. Closing e. Signature


c. The date f . Writer,<sub>s address .</sub>


- Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e
- Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order .
3. Labeling


- Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter .
4 . Comprehension questions


- Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions
a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ?


b. What are there in the heading ?
c. What is the main part of the letter ?
d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ?
e. What subject is Hoa good at ?


f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New
Year Festival ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and


answering in front of class .


III <b>/ While - writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a
letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using
the given information .


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in
front of class .


* Suggested letter :
<i>15 Quang Trung street </i>
<i>Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 </i>
<i>Dear Donna </i>


<i>Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had </i>
<i>an interesting Mother,<sub>s Day .</sub></i>


<i>We have received our second semester report last </i>
<i>month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics </i>
<i>and Math but my English and History results were </i>
<i>poor . My teacher advises me to improve English </i>
<i>and History . I think I have to study harder next </i>
<i>school year . </i>


<i>In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid </i>
<i>Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival in</i>
<i>Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long </i>
<i>Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going </i>


<i>to stay ther with them until the festival comes . I will</i>
<i>send you a postcard from there . </i>


<i>Write soon and tell me all your news . </i>
<i>Best </i>


<i>Lan , </i>


Listen and copy down


Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Copy down .


Play games .


Do the exercise
individually .


Read and check .
Label each section
with the correct letter .


Work in pairs to
practice asking and
answering the
questions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

IV / <b>Post - writing</b> : <b> Correction</b>



- Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the
mistakes .


V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her about
your second semester report and about Summer
holiday .


Read their letters
aloud .


Copy down .


Preparing date : 05 / 11 / 2009


<b> unit 5 Study habits</b>



<b>Period 30 : Lesson 6 : Language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use adverbs of manner </i>
<i>and modal Should as an advice , reported speech with commands , requests and advice .</i>
B / <b>Teaching aids </b>: <i>Text book , poster , ten cards</i> .


C / <b>Procedure </b>:


<b>I / Warm up : </b>Pelmanism


good warm bad quickly badly
well warmly quick sit sat


- Explain the meanings and uses of them


+ Hard (a) and hard ( adv ) have different meanings
II / <b>Presentation </b>1. <b>Adverbs of manner</b> .
- Setting the scene “ Use any word from the game
Pelmanism to complete the following sentences “
* Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun
or : S + be + Adjective


S + V + adverb


* Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the subject
Adv modifies the verb of the sentence .
<i>Exercise 1 / 52</i> : Complete the dialogues
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback .


<i>1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly</i>
- Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs .
2<b>. Modal : Should</b>


- Ask Ss to look at Mr Hao,<sub>s house and answer some </sub>


questions


a. Is his house new ? b. Is the wall discolored ?
c. How is the door ? d. Is there grass in his garden ?
e. Should Mr Hao repair the roof ?



Suggested answers :


a. No , it isn,<sub>t b. Yes , it is c. It is broken </sub>


d. Yes. There is lots of grass in his garden.
e. Yes, he should .


-> Explain the modal “ Should “
+ Form : S + Should + infinitive


+ Use : give advice + Meaning : nen ( lam gi )


Play games


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of
class .


Practice asking and
answering the
questions .


Listen and give


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<i>Exercise 2 / 52 </i>



Give Ss the question What should he do with his house?
mend ? / paint ? / replant ? / cut ? / repair ?


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the verbs to advise Mr
Hao what to do .


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the question “ What should he do with his house ? “
- Give feedback . a. Mr Hao should repair the roof .
b……….paint the house c.……...cut the grass .
d. …….replant the tree e…….mend the door
3. <b>Commands , requests in reported speech</b>


- Explain the form of the reported speech :


* Form : <b>To ask / tell + someone + to do something</b>
+ Example : a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ? “
=> Mr Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary
b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “


=> Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary
<i>Exercise 3 / 53</i> : Explain the situation to Ss


- Have Ss work in pairs to do exercise .


- Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud ,.
- Give feedback


a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her outside her
office .



b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your report card for
this semester .


c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you with your Spanish
pronunciation .


d. Miss Jackson told me to meet her next week .
- Call on some Ss to practice is pairs and correct their
pronunciations .


4. <b>Advice in reported speech</b>
- Explain the form of it


* Form : <b>S + said ( that ) + S + should + V ...</b>
Example : Miss Jackson said , “ Tim should work
harder on his Spanish pronunciation . “


=> Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your
Spanish pronunciation .


<i>Exercise 4 / 53 </i>


- Ask Ss to work with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to practice in pairs and correct
pronunciation .


- Give feedback



a. Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on
Spanish pronunciation .


b. Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking
Spanish every day .


c . Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish
conversation on TV .


d. Miss Jackson you should practice reading aloud
passage in Spanish .


e. Miss Jackson said you should use this dictionary to
find out how to pronounce Spanish words .


III <b>/ Homework</b> :


1. Review command , requests and advice in Reported
Speech .


2. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks.
3. Prepare the next lesson .


examples .


Practice in pairs


Practice in pairs in front
of class .



Listen and copy .
Read the examples
aloud .


Work in pairs
Practice in front of
class .


Some Ss come to the
board to write them on


Copy and read the
examples aloud .
Work in pairs


Practice in closed pairs
and open pairs .


Listen and copy .
Preparing date : 07 / 11 / 2009


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b> Period 31: lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the
<i>dialogue about the young pioneers . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , 5 cards for drill , Cassette <i>…</i>


<b>C / </b>Procedure :



I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting</b>


Ask Ss some questions about their activities and
their summer holidays .


1. What do you often do on your summer holiday ?
2. Are you members of the Young Pioneers and
Youth Organization ?


3. Are there any activity programs for the summer ?
4. Do you take part in them ?


5. What activity do you like most ?


II / <b>Presentation</b> : Introduce the topic of the lesson
and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- to enroll ( translation ) đăng ký học/ tham gia
- application form ( visual ) đơn xin tham gia
- Out door activities : Games that you play in the
open air rather than in a building or a house such
as : football , tennis .. các hoạt động
ngoài trời


- Hobby (n) së thÝch
- Acting (n) diƠn kÞch



* <b>Checking </b>: <b>Rub out and remember </b>


2. Listen and read the dialogue :


- Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight . She
wants to enroll in the activities for the summer . “
- Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same
time . - Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,<sub>s </sub>


particulars . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in
front of class.


- Give feedback


* Name : Pham Thi Nga


* Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street
* Phone number : Not available
* Date of birth : April 22 , 1989
* Sex : Female


* Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting
- Ask Ss some questions :


+ What is her name ?
+ What does she live ?
+ When was she born ?
+ What are her hobbies ?


- Call on some Ss to answer the questions .


3 . Concept checking


- What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing
- What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting


- What do you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ ->
gerund


- What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing


- When do we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some verbs :
like , love , enjoy , hate , mind .


* Form <b>Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund</b>


Chatting
( whole class )


Listen and repeat in
chorus and


individually , then
copy .


Play game


Listen to the tape
Read the dialogue


Work in pairs



Report their results in
front of class.


Answer the questions
( whole class )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

* Drill : word cue drill


- Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them :
a. play soccer / volley ball


b. watch TV / listen to music
c. read books / do homework


d. Chat with friends / do the housework
e. Cook meal / decorate the house .
=> What are your hobbies ?


I like / love playing soccer and volleyball .
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering
- Correct mistakes if any .


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
III / <b>Production Survey </b>


- Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups
of three to ask their friends and tick on the chart .


Do you like name / Nam Mai


love like don,<sub>t </sub>


hate like love like don


,<sub>t</sub>


hate like


- play soccer
- washing up
- cooking meals
- performing
music
- gathering
broken glasses
- watching TV
- playbadminton


- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends,


hobbies .


IV / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write about their friend,<sub>s hobbies . </sub>


2. Prepare the next lesson .


Listen and copy the
form . Then practice



Practice reading the
dialogue in pairs .


Work in groups


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 10 / 11 / 2009


<b>Unit 6 The young pioneers club</b>



<b>Period 32 Lesson 2 : Speak & listen</b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask for favors and </i>
<i>respond to favors . offer and respond to assistance </i>


- complete the song for details


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Cut out shark , cut out girl / boy , textbook</i> .
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Shark,<sub> s attack </sub></b>


- Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from card
- Draw some steps , then stick the cut out girl / boy on
the top of the steps , the sharks in the sea .


- Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor
II <b>/ Presentation</b>



- Ask Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR
+ What do you say to ask for a favor ?


Can you help me ? Could you do me a favor ?
Can / Could you ………..?


+ When do you ask for favor ? Need some help
+ How do you say to respond to favor ?


Certainly / Of course / sure No problem
+ What does the receptionist say ?


May I help you ?


+ What is for ? For offering assistance
+ another way to offer assistance ?


Play game


Listen and practice
asking and answering
the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Do you need any help ? / Let me help you .
+ How do you say to respond to assistance ?
Yes . No , thank you .


- Ask Ss to copy down the following phrases
<b>Asking for favor</b> <b>Responding for favor</b>



* Can / Could you help
me please ?


* Could you do me a
favor ?


* I need a favor
* Can / could you ..?


* Certainly / of course / sure
* No problem


* What can I do for you ?
* How can I help you ?
* I am sorry . I am really busy


<b>Offering assistance </b> <b>Responding to assistance </b>


* May I help you ?
* Do you need any help
?


* Let me help you .


* Yes / No . Thank you


* Yes . That is very kind of you .
* No . thank you . I am fine .
I can manage .



- Ask Ss to repeat chorally and then individually all the
phrases in the chart .


III / <b>Practice :</b>


1. Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct pronunciation if any .


2. Use appropriate phrases to make similar dialogues
about some of the following situations with a partner.
- Have Ss work in pairs .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback


IV / <b>Production</b> : <b>Situation</b> : A receptionist wants to
help a tourist who needs to go to the nearest bank
<b>Receptionist</b> : ………?


<b>Tourist</b> : yes . Can you ………..?


<b>Receptionist</b> : Sure . Turn right when you get out of
the hotel . Turn left at the first corner .


………... your right .
<b>Tourist </b> :………


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the dialogue and move


around the class and help Ss .


- Call on some Ss to practice the dialogue .


V / <b>Pre - listening</b> : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary


- to unite = doan ket , hop nhat , ket hop
- peace (n) >< war (n)


2. Guess the missing words


- Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song
- Get them to share with their partners and report their
predictions .Then write them on the board .


VI / <b>While - listening</b> :


- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check their
predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their results
- Give feedback


<i>Children of our land <b>unite </b></i>


<i>Let,<sub>s sing for </sub><b><sub>peace ,</sub></b><sub> Let</sub>,<sub>s sing for</sub><b><sub> right</sub></b><sub> .</sub></i>
<i>Let,<sub>s sing for the </sub><b><sub>love</sub></b><sub> between </sub><b><sub>north</sub></b><sub> and </sub><b><sub>south</sub></b><sub> , </sub></i>


<i>Oh, children <b>of </b>our land , unite .</i>


<i>Children of the <b>world</b> hold hands .</i>
<i>Let,<sub>s </sub><b><sub>show</sub></b><sub> our love from </sub><b><sub>place </sub></b><sub>to place .</sub></i>


<i>Let,<sub>s shout </sub><b><sub>out</sub></b><sub> loud , Let</sub>,<sub>s make a </sub><b><sub>stand</sub></b><sub> ,</sub></i>
<i>Oh , children of the <b>world </b>, hold hands . </i>


Repeat chorally ,
individually
Work in pairs


Work in pairs


Closed pairs


Practice the dialogues in
front of class


Listen and copy down
Work in groups to guess
the missing words in the
song .


Report their predictions .
Listen to the tape and
check their predictions
Read their answers .


Listen and check the



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

-Turn on the tape once more to check the results again .
VII / <b>Post - listening</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the song
+ Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally .


- Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a song
VIII/ <b>Homework</b> :


1. Learn by heart the expressions to offer assistance and
favor and how to respond them .


2. Write the dialogue between you and a tourist who lost
money .


results again .


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 11 / 11 / 2009


<b>Unit 6 The young pioneers club</b>



<b>Period 33 lesson 3 : Read</b>


<b> </b>A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about a </i>
<i>youth organization </i>–<i> the Boy Scouts of America ( BSA ) </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Text book , Poster of T /F statements</i>


C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Jumbled words </b>


- Write six words whose letters are in disorder
1. Racchtaer 4. Pexainl


2. Iojn 5 . Nessmsibuan
3. Mai 6 . Thauolgh


- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams and call on 6 Ss from h team
write the right words on the board .


1. Character 2. Join 3. Aim
4. Explain 5. Businessman 6. Although


II / <b>Pre- reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the reading
passage and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- to encourage : give the verb which means to give Sb
support


- Citizenship (n) = quyen cong dan
- coeducational (a) ( translation )
- Voluntary (a) = tu y , tu nguyen
- to lead – led – led


- to establish = to start / to create an organization


* <b>Checking</b> : <b>Slap the board </b>


2. T /F Statements prediction


- Stick the poster with the statements on the blackboard
and guess which is true , which is false .


a. The Boy Scout of America is a youth organization
b. Scouting began in America


c. William Boyce is a businessman in LOndon .
d. Boys and girls can join BSA


e. The Scouting Association is the biggest voluntary
youth organization in the world .


- Call on Ss to report their predictions and write them on
the board


III / <b>While - reading : </b>
1. Reading :


- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books at the
same time to read the passage to check their predictions
- Call on some Ss to read their results aloud and give
feedback :


a. T b. F c. F d. F e. T
- Have them correct false statements .
b. Scout began in England



c. William Boysce is an American business man .


Work in teams


Listen and copy


Repeat chorally ,
individually .
Play game


Work in groups to
predict .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

d. BSA is mainly for boys .


- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .
- Correct mistakes if any .


2. Fill in the missing dates


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise 1 / 57
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback :a.1907 b. 1909 c. 1910 d. 1994
3. Answer :


- Have Ss work in pairs to practice asking answering the
questions .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class


- Give feedback


a. Scouting began in England in 1907


b. The meeting between a boy scout and Mr William Boyce led the
Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910 .


c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides Association and Camp Fire
Boys and girls .


d. They are building characters , good citizenship and personal
fitness .


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> : Interview a member of the Boys
Scouts of American


- Call on an excellent student in class to practice with
the teacher .


- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs


<b>Interview</b> <b>Member of BSA</b>


1. When did scouting
begin ?


2. When were the
aims established ?
3. Can a girl join the
BSA ?



4 . How many
members does the
Scouting Association
have now ?


5. Is it the largest
voluntary Youth
Organization in the
world ?


- In 1907 in England
- They were established in
1907 . They are building the
characters , good citizenship
and personal fitness .


- No , It is mainly for boys
but girls can join similar
organization such as the Girl
Guides Association or the
Coeducational Camp fire
Boys and Girls .


Over 25 million
- Yes, Of course


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Learn by heart new words and write the summary of


the BSA


2. Prepare the next lesson


Read the passage aloud .
Work in pairs to do the
exercise


Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions .


Work in open pairs


Listen and copy


Preparing date : 14 / 11 / 2009


<b>Unit 6 The young pioneers club</b>



<b>Period 34 Lesson 4 : Write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter about a </i>
<i>future plan using be going to </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Text book , chalk , board</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Revision of the structure Be going to </b>
- Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a


future plan .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

- Get Ss to make the sentence :


“ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin with
a letter from A to Z


Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation .
S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle
S2 : I am going to clean the floor .
S3 : I am going to dust the furniture ..


II / <b>Pre - writing</b> : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to Ss .


1 . Pre – teach vocabulary :
- to raise fund ( translation )
- a bank ( visual )


- natural resources : coal oil , iron .. under the ground or
the sea .


2. Reading the notice


- Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y members
of the school “


- Ask some questions to check their understanding
a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in the
recycling program ?



b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ?
c. What other programs can members of the Y and Y
participate in ?


- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Give feedback and ask them to practice in open pairs .
3. Complete the letter


- Ask some questions to set the scene :
* Who writes the letter ? ( Nga )


* To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh )
* Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes )


* What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes
about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is
going to participate )


- Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter .
- Give feedback :1. community 2.recycling 3.collect
4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn


8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping


- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and correct
mistakes if any .


4. Reading the dialogue :



- Set the scene “ Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y and Y
Green Group , about the activities that she is going to do
.”


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt .
* Checking : some questions :


a. Why does Hoa look happy ?


b. What is she going to do in the environment month ?
c. What are they doing to earn money for their school
Y&Y ?


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in front
of the class .


III / <b>While - writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents .
- Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on
poster .


- Move around the class and help them if they are
necessary .


IV/ <b>Post - writing :</b>


- Choose four letters from 4 group and stick them on the
board



Play game


Listen and copy
Listen and repeat
chorally and
individually
Copy down


Read the notice and
answer the questions


Practice asking and
answering the questions
in pairs


Listen and answer
( the whole )


Work in pairs to
complete the letter .


Read the complete letter
.


Listen and copy .


Practice asking and
answering the
questions .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

- Get the whole class to read the 4 letters and correct
them .


- Give feedback : <b>Suggested letter</b>


Dear Mom and Dad ,


I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in the
Y & Y Green Group of my school .


The green Group is holding an environment month plan .
We are going to clean the lakes,<sub>banks on weekends . We</sub>


are also going to plant trees and flowers in the parks and
water them every afternoon after class . We are planting
young trees and plants to sell to other schools .


I hope that we can bring more green to the city and earn
some money for the school Y&Y . The program is very
interesting and useful , is not it ?


I am still in a very good health . I will tell you more
about the group activities later .


With love ,


Hoa .


V / <b>Homework :</b>



1. Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her
parents in their notebooks .


Stick their letters on the
board and correct its
mistakes


Read the suggested
letter aloud


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 15 / 11 / 2009


<b>Unit 6 The young pioneers club</b>



<b>Period 35 Lesson 5 : language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present with future</i>
<i>meaning / Gerunds / modals : may , can , could .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , chalk , board ..</i>
C / <b>Procedure :</b>


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Brainstorming </b>


*Possible answers :


- <i>Clean up the streets </i>
- <i>Help elderly people </i>


- <i>Take part in sports</i>


- <i>Help handicappied / street children </i>
- <i>Collect and empty garbage</i>…..
II / <b>Presentation : </b>


1. Present tense with future meaning
a. Pre – teach vocabulary


- a ret home : a place where old or sick people are cared
for


- an orphanage : a place where children without parents
live


- a stadium ( picture )


* <b>Checking</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>


b. Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan and
Mai are members of the Y&Y organization . They are


Play game


Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down


Play game
Listen carefully



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

talking about the summer activity program”
Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ?
Mai : at Dong Xuan Market .


Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………?
Mai : On January 9


Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..?
Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai to
practice the dialogue .


- Give feedback


1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage
4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at
c. Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to check
their understanding


a. When do we “ where “ ?
b. When do we use “ when “ ?
c. When do we use “ what time “ ?
d. Is the date at present or in the future ?
e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ?


=> We use simple present tense to express an action that
happens in the future .



- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the
Y&Y activity by using the following cues


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
- Give feedback


2. <b>Gerunds</b> :


* Form : <b>Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving</b>
* Survey :


- Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friends
and stick on the chart .


- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends,


hobbies .


Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like cooking
and especially hate washing dishes . ..


3<b>. Modals : may , can , could</b>


- Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering assistance ,
asking for favors and how to respond .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of
the class .



- Give feedback


a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ?
B : Can you take me across the road ?


C : Could you help me with this math problem ?
D : Can you water the flowers in the garden?
b / A : May I help you ?


A : Do you need any help ?
B : Let me help you .


A : Yes . That is very kind of you .


- Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the class .
III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Work in pairs to practice
the dialogue


Practice asking and
answering to draw the
form


Copy down .


Practice asking and


answering the questions
about the Y&Y activity .
Listen and copy .


Work in groups of three
or four


Report their results .
Repeat the uses of the “
Asking for favors /
offering assistance and
how to respond “


Practice speaking the
dialogue


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Preparing date : 22 / 11 / 2009

<b>Period 36 </b>

: consolidation


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson students have chance to revise the words and main grammar
from Unit 4 to Unit 6 in order to prepare for the test.


<b>II. Contents. </b><i> Grammar: - Present, past simple, used to, prepositions</i>
- Reported speech of command, requests, advice.
- Gerund, modal verbs


<b>III/ Teaching aids</b>: books and notebooks..



<b>IV/ Procedure:</b>


<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher & Students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


1.
Warm up


2.
Presentaion


3.
Practice


- Holding the class in order and
check the old lesson.


- Call a pupil to give exanples using
<i>Used to... and modal verbs with can,</i>
<i>could</i>


? Form & Use of it
? Example – correct
? Adv


? Use of “ Used to”
? e.g.


? Form & position
? e.g.



Retell the prepositions
? Use of them? Correct


? form and use of it
? examples – correct


? retell the modal verbs


? Retell form of commands requests?


- Go to the bb to write sentences.
+ I used to go to the movies when
I lived in Hanoi


+ I can play soccer


+ I could swim when I was ten


<b>1. Tenses:</b>


<b>* Present simple:</b>


- S+ Is/am/ are + (o)
- S+V- ( s/es)+ (o)


<b>* Past simple: </b>


- S+V- Past + (o)


- Adv: ago last+, yesterday ….


- Used to for past habit


e.g. I used to city a lot when I was
a baby


<b>2. Adverbs of manner: </b>


- adj + ly = adv


- Good – well; fast – fast; hard
– hard


<b>3. Prepositions. </b>


In , on, of , at, about, to , for,
behind, under, beneath, between,
above, ....


<b>4. Gerund: </b>


+ V – ing


- It is used after prep, Some Vs:
like…


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

4.
Production


– reported form
? form of advice



? Reposted form?


? In 2 groups


G1: Make direct sentences


G2. Change it to indirect speech ( in
tum)


Correct


? Retell the main gram?


- can, may, could, should....


<b>6. Reported speech of </b>


<b>commands, requests, advice</b>


<i>- Reposted speech of command, </i>
<i>requests </i>


Tell/ aks+ Sb = To + V infinitive +
( o)


<i>- Advice in reported speech </i>
+ Advice+ Sb + to + V infi+ ( o)
+ Say + S + should + V infi + (o)
E.g.: Lan said to me “ You should


lean hard”


-> Lan advised me to learn hard
-> Lan said I should learn hard


5. Homework: - Remind Ps to study at home and revise the main grammar structures
from unit 4 to unit 6. Prepare for the next test.




Preparing date : 23 / 11 / 2009


<b>Period 37 </b>

<b> </b>

<b>witten Test 2</b>



<b>A </b>

/

<b>Aims and Objectives</b>

: <i>Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they </i>
<i>have learnt to do the test well . </i>


B /

<b>Teaching aids</b>

: <i>Papers , chalks and boards . </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<b>Contents</b> <b>R</b>ecognizing Understanding <b> Using</b>


<b> Total</b>
result selfthinking result selfthinking result selfthinking


<b>1. Phonetics</b> <b>4 </b>


<b>0.25</b> <b>4 1.0</b>


<b>2 .language </b>



<b>focus</b> <b>0.254</b> <b>6 0.5</b> <b>10 4.0</b>


<b>3 . reading</b> <b>5 0.5</b> <b>5 2.5</b>


<b>4. writing</b> <b>5 2.5</b>


<b>5 2.5</b>
<b> total</b> <b>4 1.0 15 6.5</b> <b>5 2.5</b> <b>24</b>


<b> 10.0</b>


<b>D / T</b>

est



<b>I - Choose the word that has the underlined letter pronounced differently from </b>
<b>the others .</b>


1 . A. plant<b>ed</b> B. work<b>ed</b> C . collect<b>ed</b> D . need<b>ed</b>


2 . A. <b>e</b>nroll B. h<b>e</b>lp C . p<b>e</b>ncil D. sp<b>e</b>nd
3 . A. <b>h</b>ow B. <b>h</b>ighlight C . <b>h</b>our D. <b>h</b>ot


4 . A. cook<b>s</b> B. stop<b>s</b> C . get<b>s</b> D. play<b>s</b>


Your answers : 1………….; 2…………..; 3…………..; 4………


<b>II- Complete the sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets.</b>


1 . ………….problem,sir! ( any / without / no )


2. ………I help you,Madam? ( should / may / need )


3. Could you………..me a favor, please ?(do / make / take)
4. Do you ……….any help? (have / need / think )


<b>III- Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracket to complete the sentences.</b>


1. Mrs Jackson………..Tim a lot of homework last week.( give )
2. Nam likes………to music.( listen)


3. Hoa………..to school by bike everyday. (go)


4. Nga ………..the Y&Y Green Group last summer vacation.(not
join)


5. He used to………..swimming in summer.(go )
6. I………..TV every night. ( not watch )


<b>IV-</b> <b>Read the passage and answer the questions</b>.


In the first year of lower secondary school. Nga had some difficulties in learning
English.Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar
was worse.She did not know how to improve them .


One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside
the classroom .She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her
pronunciation with a cassette.She also told her how to use an English-English
dictionary to improve her English grammar.Now her English is better and she has just
won a prize in the English Speaking contest.


1. What difficulties did Nga have in the first year of lower secondary school?



………
………


2. Did she know how to improve her English?


………
………


3.Who helped her improve her English?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

………


………..


4. How did she help her to improve her English grammar?


………


………..


5. How is her English now?


………


………..


<b>V- Rewrite the following sentences into reported speech</b>.
1. “ Eat more fruits and vegetables.” The doctor said to me.


- The doctor told me………



2. “ Can you open the door, Nam” Hoa said.


- Hoa asked………


3. “can you turn down the radio,please?” my father said to me.


-My father asked………


4. “you should practice speaking English everyday”the teacher said to Nam.


- The teacher said………


5. “ please, give Hoa this book” Nam asked me.


- Nam asked………


Preparing date : 29 / 11 / 2009


<b>Period 38 : </b>

<b> </b>

<b>test correction</b>



<b>I / Aims and Objectives : </b>By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:
-Get the correct answers of the test.


- Understand more about how to do a test.


<b>II</b> / <b>Correction</b>


<b>1 . Pre-correcting</b> .



a. Making a few remarks on the test.
b. Giving the paper back .


<b>2. While correcting</b> .
a. giving the answers.


<b>Exercise 1: </b>

4 . 0,25=1,0 mark


1 2 3 4
B A C D

<b>Exercise 2 :</b>

4 . 0,25 = 1,0




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>Exercise 3</b>

:

6 . 0,5 = 3.0


1 2 3 4 5 6
gave listening goes <sub>Didn</sub><sub>’</sub><sub>t join</sub> go <sub>Don</sub><sub>’</sub><sub>t watch</sub>


<b> Exercise 4:</b>



1- In the first year of lower secondary school , Nga had some difficulties in learning
english .


2- No, she did not know how to improve her English.
3- Her teacher of English helped her improve her English.


4- She told her how to use an English – English dictionary to improve her Enlish
grammar.



5- Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking
Contest.


<b>Exercise 5:</b>



1 – The doctor told me to eat more fruits and vegetables.
2 – Hoa asked Nam to open the door.


3 – My father asked me to turn down the radio.


4 – The teacher said that Nam should practice speaking English everyday.
5 – Nam asked me to give Hoa that book.


<b>3 . Post- correcting</b> .


- Focus on how to do a test .
- Get the test back


<b>4 . Consolidation</b> :


- Preparing for unit 7 .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Preparing date : 29 / 11 / 2009


<b>Unit 7 : My neighborhood</b>



<b>Period 39 Lesson 1 : Getting started</b>

<b> - </b>

<b> Listen and read </b>
A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson . Ss will be able to know more

<i>about Na,<sub>s new neighbor . </sub></i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook , cassette , boards , chalk ..


<b>C / </b>Procedure :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Getting started </b>


- Ask Ss to match the names of places with the
suitable pictures


- Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss know
exactly what they mean


* Answers :


a. grocery store b. stadium
c. wet market d. drug store
e. hairdresser,<sub>s f. swimming pool </sub>


II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the
passage reading and some new words


1. Pre – teach vocabulary


- close by (adv) : a short distance
- to serve : give sb food or drink
- a pancake : banh ran


- tasty (a) = delicious (a)



* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>What and where</b>


2. Guiding questions :


- Set the scene “ Nam and Na are talking about the
place where they live . But Na is new there . “
Questions :


a. How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ?
b. Where does Na want to go ?


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and predict the answers
and call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .


III / <b>While - reading</b> :


1. Ask Ss to read silently the dialogue between Nam
and Na then ask them if their answers are correct or
not .


- Give feedback :


a. He has lived there for 10 years .
b. Na wants to go to a restaurant .


2. Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 / 64 individually ,
then compare with their partners .



- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback


a. new b. last week c. tired
d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes
3. Answers given :


- Give Ss some answers and ask them to make
questions .


a. Nam has lived here for 10 years .
b. Yes. my mother is too tired to cook .
c. The restaurant serves Hue food .


Play game
( whole class )


Listen and copy .


Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down


Play game


Listen to the scene and
work in groups to
predict the answers to
the guiding questions .



Report their
predictions .


Read the dialogue to
check their predictions


Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

d. Hue food is very good.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and
answering


=> Questions


a. How long has Nam lived here ?
b. Is Na,<sub>s mother tired ? </sub>


c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ?
d. What is the food like ?


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> : <b>Write </b>


- Ask Ss to write a passage about their neighborhood
by answering the following questions


a. How long have you lived in your neighborhood ?
b. Do you like it ? Why ?


c . Is there a restaurant / post – office / market /


bank / shop in your neighborhood ?


d.How do you do to keep your neighborhood clean ?
- Move around the class and help Ss


- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
- Correct mistakes .


V / <b>Homework : </b>


1. Write the complete writing about their
neighborhood .


2. Do exercise in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


practice asking and
answering the
questions


Open pairs -> closed
pairs


Write individually
Demonstrate their
writings in front of
class.


Listen and copy .



<b> </b> Preparing date : 02 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 7 : My neighborhood</b>



<b>Period 40 lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk how to send </i>
<i>parcels or letters . </i>


<i>to know what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening .</i>
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , chalk , board, cassette ….</i>


<i><b>C / </b></i>Procedure :
A – SPEAK :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting </b>


- Show a letter and ask Ss some questions


+ What is this ? + Where can I post it to my friend ?
+ How can I post it ? + How much ?


+ Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ?
+ Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?


 Lead in the new lesson .
II / <b>Presentation</b> :


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :



- air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air


- surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or ship
- charge (v / n )


Play game
( whole class )


Listen and repeat
chorally , individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>
2. Reading comprehension


- Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Qui
Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .”


- Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in pairs to
compare their answers .


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the answers
a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface
mail ? Why ?


b. What is the weight of her parcel ?
c. How much does she pay ?


- Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions .
III / <b>Practice </b>:



- Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and practice
the dialogue with teacher ( clerk )


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Correct
their pronunciation


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of
class .


IV / <b>Further practice</b> :


- Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue
1. Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail


- Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the clerk
in the post office .


- Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue
themselves .


B – LISTEN :


II / <b>Pre - listening</b> :


- Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood . She is
talking to Nam about what she is going to do on the
weekend .”


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the answers
and fill in the blanks in each advertisement



III / <b>While - listening</b> :
1. Listening task 1 :


- Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers
- Give feedback


a. The new comer b. Town Ground
c. English speaking contest d . Culture House
2. Listening task 2 :


- Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66
- Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has
no information


- Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends .
- Give feedback


- Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in the
correct boxes : True ? False or No information


Statements T F No


a. Na does not know the b
neighborhood very well
b. Na does not like movies
c. Na will go to the photo
exhibition this weekend


d. Na will not go to the English


speaking Contest


e. Na will go to the soccer match
with Nam


f. Nam is a soccer fan .


X


X
X


X
X


X
3.Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding of


Copy down
( whole class )
Play game


Listen carefully .
Work in pairs


Read the dialogue to
fine out the answers .



.


Practice the dialogue
with teacher .


Work in open pairs
Work in closed pairs .


Practice the dialogues ,
using the situations .
( whole class )


Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

the conversation .


- Turn on the tape again .
a. Does Na like movies ?


b.Why won’t she go to see the film “ The New comer “ ?
c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ?


d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ?
e. What time does the match start ?


IV / <b>Post - Listening</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends about
what Na is going to do this weekend .



- Call on some volunteers from each group to tell the
whole class about Na .


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write a short passage about what Na is going to do .
2. Do exercises in workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson


Practice asking and
answering the
questions .
( whole class )


Work in group


Listen and copy .
Preparing date : 06 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 7 : My neighborhood</b>



<b>Period 41 lesson 3 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the </i>
<i>passage about a new shopping Mall </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , cassette , chalk , board</i>
C / <b>Procedure :</b>



I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Guessing the words</b>


- Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the words
as quickly as possible .


1. a place where you can buy everything ( supermarket)
2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit .
( greengrocery store)


3. A place where you can buy books . ( bookstore)
4. A place where you can come to eat . ( restaurant)
5. A place where you can come to see the movies .


6. A person who comes to the store and buys something .
( buyer) ( customer)


=> Lead in the new lesson


II / <b>Pre - reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss :


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- a roof ( picture )


- convenient = thuan loi


- a selection = a process of choosing carefully .
- available = san co de dung , co the de dung
- a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies
theaters are under one roof .



- a resident = cu dan


* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>What and where</b>
2 . Brainstorming :


- Set the scene “ In Nam,<sub>s neighborhood , there is a new </sub>


shopping mall .


- Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the mall .


Play game
( whole class )


Listen and copy
Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down .


Play games .


Listen and do the task


Read them aloud and


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

* Possible answers :
- wide selection of goods
- lower prices



- buy many things at the same time
- have fun or relax while shopping
III / <b>While - reading</b>


- Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their or get
more information .


- Give feedback


- Explain the meanings of some phrases rapidly
+ under one roof


+ shop in comfort
+ take their business
+ offer a wider selection
+ especially stores


+ have been concerned about
* True / False statements


- Have Ss look at the statements in the box and get them
to read the text again and decide which statements are
true , which are false .


Statements True False


1. A mall is open six days a week .
2. There are more than 50 stores in the
mall .



3. Everyone in the neighborhood is
pleased about the new mall .


4. It will be more comfortable to shop
in the mall than in the present shopping
area .


5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu
Street may have to close .


- Have Ss correct the false statements
1. The mall is open daily


2. There are 50 stores in the mall .


3. Not everyone is pleased . The owner of the small
stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy .


* Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in the
exercise 2/ 68


- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions


- Get all Ss to work in pairs
- Give feedback


IV <b>/ Post - reading</b> :



- Give a situation and ask Ss to discuss it “ Do you want
to have a new mall in your neighborhood ? If there is
one , what will happen to the residents ? “


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
V / <b>Homework</b> :


copy .


Work individually


Work in pairs


Work in pairs


Work in group


Listen and copy .
<b>the convenience of </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

1. Copy their ideas about there is a mall in their
neighborhood .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Preparing date : 15 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 7 : My neighborhood</b>



<b>Period 42: Lesson 4 : write </b>



A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a notice
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : Text book , chalk , boards …


C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting </b>


1. Have you ever written a notice ?
2. To whom ?


3. What for ?
4. What type ?


=> Lead in the new lesson .


II / <b>Pre - writing</b> : Introduce the topic of the writing
and the scene “ The residents and store owners on
Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to
discuss the effects of the new mall . “


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :


- effects (n) = tac dong , tac dung , hieu qua
- contact (v) = lien lac


- hardware store = dung cu dong dung trong nha
2. Guiding questions



a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran
Phu street going to hold a meeting ?


b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ?
c. Where will they hold the meeting ?


- Get Ss to read the notice and answer some
questions to check their understanding.


- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the
questions .


- Give feedback


a. To discuss the effects of the new mall


b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m
c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao
Street , Binh ,<sub>s hardware store . </sub>


- Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full
sentences .


* Reading :


- Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some questions
to check their understanding , get them to use short
answers .


1. What is the English Speaking club going to hold ?


2. Where and when will it be held ?


3. What time ?


d. Who is the person contact ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .


III / <b>While -writing : </b>


- Get Ss to write the notice individually
- Monitor and help them write


Play game
( whole class)


Listen and copy .


Work in pairs


Read individually
Practice asking and
answering the
questions .


Work in the whole
class .


Work in pairs



Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

- Ask Ss to share with their partners
- Check some notices and correct them
- Write the model notice on the board
Suggested answers :


<b>The school English Speaking club</b>


<b>Holding A Speaking Contest to</b>
<b>celebrate teacher,<sub>s day</sub></b>


Date : November 15


Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm
Place : Hall 204 , Building G


Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at
the above address for more information .


V / <b>Post - writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to write one notice about their class
meeting


- Get them to work in group


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback



V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write the completed notice in their notebooks .
2. Do exercises in workbook .


Work in pairs
Whole class


Read the correct notice


Work in group


Listen and copy .


<b> </b>


<b> </b>Preparing date : 16 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 7 : My neighborhood</b>



<b>Period 43 Lesson 5 : Language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present Perfect </i>
<i>Tense and some adjectives to make comparisons . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , 10 cards for pelmanism , poster</i> ..
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up: Matching </b>



- Stick a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on the
board.


- Divide the class into 2 teams


- Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write
each pair of infinitive – past participle


be see collected go worked
lived do seen eat attended
write been written eaten work
attend done live collect gone


- Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

participles of irregular verbs .
II / <b>Presentation :</b>


- Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam ,<sub>s neighborhood . </sub>


They are talking to each other .”


- Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na , then
ask them to complete it


Na : How long ….. you … in this neighborhood ?
Nam : I ... here …..10 years .


Na : Really . It is a long time .



* Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for
- Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to practice
in pairs .


=> Form : <b>have / has + past participle</b>


Use : to talk about something which started in the
past and continues up to the present


We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the Present
Perfect Tense


<b>For + length of time</b>
<b>Since + starting point</b>
<b>Exercises</b> :


1. Ex 2 :


- Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which is
the length of time and which is starting point .


- Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For
- Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since
2. Ex 3 : - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to
make full sentences .


- Correct their pronunciation


Example : I / live / here / last week



 I have lived here since last week


3 .Ex 4: Ask Ss to complete the conversations
- Have them work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback


1. have been 2. hope
3. have lived 4. is
5. want 6. looks
7. have been 8. have seen
- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs .
4 . Ex 5


<b>* Game : </b>Pelmanism


<i>different</i> <i>cheap</i> <i>expensive</i> <i>long</i> <i>same</i>


<i>modern</i> <i>short</i> <i>big</i> <i>small</i>


- Show Ss 3 books , a red book and a yellow one which
have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then
ask Ss to make comparisons


Example :


- The red book is the same as the yellow one
- The red book is as big as the yellow one


- The yellow book is different from the brown
dictionary .


- The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary .
=> Form : <b>The same as …</b>


<b> ( not ) as … as </b>
<b> different from</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 5 / 70
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback


a. not as big as b. different from


Repeat chorally ,


individually , then copy
Listen and copy


Work in pairs
Practice in front of
class .


Listen and copy .


Work on the whole class


Work individually



Work in pairs


Work in groups


Listen and repeat
chorally , individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

c. different from d. the same as
e. not as big as f. the same as


g. as long as h. not as modern as i. not as cheap as
III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


* <b>Feedback</b> :


Listen and copy
Work in pairs
Listen and copy .




Preparing date : 17 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 8 : Country life and city life</b>



<b> Period 44: lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>



A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the city life </i>
<i>and the country life </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards .</i>
<b>C / </b>Procedure :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting </b>


- Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the country
by asking some questions


1. Where do you live ?


2. Do you want to live in the city ? Why ?
3. Do you want to live in the country ? Why ?
=> Lead in the new lesson


II / <b>Pre -reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- a relative = uncles , aunts cousins
- peaceful = quiet and calm (a)


- permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time


Chatting



( whole class )


Listen and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- accessible = co the den gan duoc


- medical facilities = cac phuong tien y te


* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>
2. Brainstorming <b>(</b> <b> Getting started )</b>


- Get Ss to talk about city life and country life . The
words in the box of getting started may help you .


 Possible answers :


- tall buildings - beautiful views
- plenty kinds of goods - fresh food
- polluted air - fresh air
- traffic jams - friendly
- entertainment - peaceful
- busy


III / While – reading :
1. True / false statements


Statements True False


1. Na lives in the city



2. Na went to a village which has
some relatives lives there .


3. The village is very peaceful and
quiet


4. Hoa prefers the city life


x
x
x


x
- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to
predict the true / false statements .


- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write
them on the board.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and
compare their ideas


- Give feedback and get more information
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
2. Comprehension questions :


- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in ex 2 /
73


- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the


questions in front of class .


- Give feedback


a. Na has been to Kin Lien village
b. She was there for the weekend


c. to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and there
is nothing to do .


d. There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket , no
zoos …


e. Country life is becoming better . Many remote area
are getting electricity . People can now have things like
refrigerators and TV , medical facilities are more
accessible .


- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs
IV / <b>Post - reading</b> :


Discussion


Copy down
Play game


Work in groups


Work in groups to
predict



Read the dialogue ,
compare their ideas
Practice the dialogue in
pairs


Work in pairs


Practice asking and
answering the questions


city life country


life


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

- Divide the class into 4 groups . Two groups include Ss
who prefer the city life and the others include Ss who
prefer the country life .


- Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions
“ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “
- Call on 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their ideas
before class .


V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Learn by heart new words and copy two lines for each
word


2. Copy the answers in their notebooks .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Work in groups


Demonstrate their ideas
in front of class .


Listen and copy


Preparing date : 21 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 8 : Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 45 : lesson 2 : Speak and listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice speaking </i>
<i>about the changes of a place </i>


<i> - to complete the dialogue by listening </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>textbooks , pictures , poster</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


<b>A - speak</b>


I <b>/ Warm up and pre - speaking</b>
<b>Word square</b>
- Ask Ss to find out 7 adjectives


<b>E</b> <b>X</b> <b>P</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>S</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b>



<b>O</b> <b>A</b> <b>M</b> <b>D</b> <b>N</b> <b>U</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b>


<b>U</b> <b>B</b> <b>O</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>A</b>


<b>I</b> <b>C</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>U</b>


<b>Y</b> <b>L</b> <b>E</b> <b>T</b> <b>L</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>T</b>


<b>S</b> <b>M</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b> <b>H</b> <b>G</b> <b>I</b>


<b>U</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>Y</b> <b>F</b>


<b>B</b> <b>P</b> <b>T</b> <b>F</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>L</b> <b>U</b>


- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams


- Ask Ss to go to the board and circle the word they find
- The team which circles more words will win the
game .


Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall – expensive –
beautiful


 Setting the scene “ Hoa,<sub>s grand father is 78 “ </sub>


- Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger than
she is now .


- Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health


=> Hoa,<sub>s grand father is getting weaker </sub>


+ Form : <b>am / is / are + V-ing </b>


+ Use : <b>used to describe changes with get and </b>
<b>become </b>


II / <b>While - speaking</b> :


- Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk
to their partners about the changes of the town . The
words in the box under the pictures may help you
- Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can
speak easily


- traffic - > busy
- sky -> cloudy
- houses -> high
- city -> beautiful


Work in group


Work in the whole
class .


Listen and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

- trees - > green
- Get Ss to work in pairs
- Monitor and help Ss speak


* Possible answers :


- The traffic is getting busier .


- There are more tall buildings and houses .
- The houses are getting more modern
- The town is becoming more beautiful .


- The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier
III / <b>Post - speaking</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about changes in
their hometown / neighborhood .


- Call on volunteer from each group to show their ideas
before the class . Other groups can add in their ideas .
<b>B - LISTEN</b>


I / <b>Pre - listening</b>


- Set the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the
phone . She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “
- Ask Ss to predict information in the dialogue .
- Call on some Ss to report their predictions
II / <b>While - listening</b> :


- Turn on the tape and check their predictions


- Let them listen twice and find out the missing words
individually .



- Ask Ss to share their answers with their partners
- Call some Ss to read their results


Give feedback


1. that 2. this 3. It is


4. where 5. from 6. coming
7. next week 8. arriving 9. Thursday
10 . late 11. afternoon 12 . speak
13. my 14 . get her


III / <b>Post - listening</b>


- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Aunt Hang to
practice the dialogue


IV / <b>Homework :</b>


Write some sentences , using Present Progressive Tense
to describe changes in their school


Work in group
Work individually


Work in groups to
predict .


Listen to the tape to


check their predictions
Listen again and share
their answers with their
friends .


Read their answers
aloud .


Work in pairs to practice
the dialogue


Listen and copy .




Preparing date : 23 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 8 : Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 46 lesson 3 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text </i>
<i>about one of the social problems . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , poster , cassette</i> .
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

I / <b>Warm up</b> :


<b>Jumbled words</b>



- Write the words with disordered letters on the board .
+ Fulentipl -> plentiful


+ taneru -> nature
+ loofd -> flood
+ roestdy -> destroy
+ viroped -> provide
+ suertl -> result
+ ciliestial -> facilities


- Ask them to write the correct words on the board and
repeat chorally , individually


=> Lead in the new lesson .
II / <b>Pre- reading</b> :


- Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some
new words to Ss .


1. <b>Pre - teach vocabulary</b> :


- rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside
- urban ( adj ) >< rural


- strain (n) = su qua tai ( dan so )
- typhoon (n) = storm (n)


- drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time
- to struggle = dau tranh



- migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to
another especially in order to find work .


- to increase = tang len , tang them


* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>What and where </b>
2. Brainstorming :


- Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmers,<sub>life </sub>


Possible answers :


droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations / lack
of clean water / electricity / insects destroy harvests ..


- Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers deal
with difficulties


- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write
them on the board


III / <b>While - reading</b> :


- Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to
check their predictions .


- Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve their
problem ? “



=> They have to move to the city so that they can get
well – paid jobs .


- Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class .
1. <b>Gap- filling</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary , using
the information from the passage .


- Call on some volunteers to report their results
- Give feedback


<i>1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural </i>


Work in group


Listen and copy down


Listen and repeat
chorally , individually ,
then copy down .


Play game


Work in groups


Demonstrate in front of
class


Work in groups to guess


the difficulties of


farmers .


Listen to the tape and
read the text to check
their predictions
Answer the question
Read the text aloud .
Work in pairs


Read their results .
difficulties of


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<i>5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals </i>
<i> 9. problem 10 . world </i>


- Call on some Ss to read the complete passage aloud
2. Finding the words


- Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their
partners


- Call them to report their results
- Give feedback


<i>a. rural b. plentiful c. increase </i>
d. strain e. tragedy f. urban


IV / <b>Post - reading :</b> <b>Discussion</b>



- Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what would
you do for farmers ?


- Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss
* Suggested answers :


- build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside
- build schools , hospitals


- provide clean water , electricity , facilities
- build factory .


- Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas
before the class .


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Write 5 things that government should do for the rural
areas .


2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Read the complete
summary .


Read the text again and
do the exercise 2 / 75
Read the complete


results .


Work in groups to
discuss


Show their ideas before
class .


Listen and copy .


Preparing date : 24 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 8 : Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 47 : Lesson 4 : write </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write letters to their </i>
<i>friends about their neighborhood .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , cards , chalks……….</i>
<b>C </b>/ Procedure :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Revision </b>


- Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the
correct order .


- Prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them .



- Call 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order
- Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct
order .


- Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy .
1. Heading


- Writer,<sub>s address </sub>


- Date


- Dear ………... ,
2. opening
3. Body
4. closing


II / <b>Pre- writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions


- Give feedback


III / <b>While … writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their
neighborhood


Work on the whole


class .


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions


Work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

- Let them write individually .


- Have them compare with their partners and correct if
they can .


* Suggested letter :
( Writer,<sub>s address)</sub>


( Date )
Dear ....,


I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a large
house with four rooms and a small garden . My sister
and I share one bedroom . From the bedroom window , I
can see a beautiful park with green tress , flowers and a
pond . we do not live far form my school so I usually
walk there .


In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool and a
beautiful park . On the weekend , I often go swimming


with my friends . Early in the morning , I always jog
with my sister around the park . But the thing I like best
in my neighborhood is the public library near my school
. There I not only can study and read books but also
watch video and learn how to use the computer .


Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood ? Is
there anything interesting in the place where you live ?
Write to me


I would like to say goodbye now . I am looking forwards
to hearing from you soon .


Love ,
( Signature )


IV / <b>Post - writing</b> : <b>Correction </b>


- Choose some letters to correct before class and ask
them to read them aloud .


V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Write their letters on their notebooks
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Compare with their
partners


Exchange their writings


to correct .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Preparing date : 25 / 12 / 2009


<b>Unit 8 : Country life and city life</b>



<b>Period 48 : lesson 5 : Language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present </i>
<i>progressive and comparative and superlative adjectives .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbooks , chalks , boards</i>…
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


<b>I / Warm up : </b>Matching


A B Key


1. play
2. do
3. watch
4. go
5. clean
6. have
7. phone
8. speak


a. to Mom
b. table tennis
c. a program


d. a meeting


e. my aunt , Mrs Hang
f. the house


g. my homework
h. to violin lesson


1.b
2.g
3.c
4.h
5.f
6.d
7.e
8.a
- Call 2 volunteers from 2 teams to do the matching
II / Practice :


1. Ex 2 : Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the Present
Progressive Tense to complete the exercise


- Get Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogues before
class and correct


=> What tense do we use in 6 dialogues ?
What is the form ?



Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue . Are they
at present or in the future ?


Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about the
future .


2. Ex 1 : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example
S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?


S2 : Is that good fortune ?
S1 : That is right


S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .
S1 : Oh , no !


S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45


- Give them the shipping information and ask them to
make similar dialogues


3. Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe
changes with “ get “ and “ become “


* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues
a. The boys / get / tall


b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark


d. The weather / get / cold


e. The students / get / better


f. The school yard / become / cleaner


- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually


- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class
can remember the structure .


4 . Comparative and superlative adjectives


- Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative
adjectives


* Comparative : <b>Short adj - er + than + object </b>


Work in group
( 2 teams )


Work in pairs


Answer the questions


Work in pairs


Work individually


Repeat chorally ,
individually



Repeat the form of
comparative and
superlative adjectives


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b> More long adj + than + object </b>


* Superlative : <b> The + short adjective - est </b>
<b> The most + long adjective</b>


* Irregular adjectives


good/ well – better – the best
bad – worse – the worst
many – more – the most
little – less – the least


Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons
between the city and the country .


Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences they
have made .


- Give feedback


IV / <b>Further practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to read the advertisements then ask them some
questions to check their understanding



+ what are advertised ?


( an apartment , a villa and a house )
+ How old are they ?


( The apartment is 2 years old , the villa is 5 years old and the
house is new )


+ How much do we pay per month ?


( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million dongs for the
house and 7,8 million dongs for the villa )


- Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using comparative and
superlative adjectives


old expensive big


expensive small hot


big beautiful old


Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment


- The house is more expensive than the apartment
V / <b>Homework </b>:


1/Redo all the exercises and copy down
2/ Prepare the next lesson .



Listen and copy


Work in pairs


Listen and answer the
questions


Play game
( whole class )


Listen and copy


Preparing date : 06/12 / 2009


<b> Period 49 + 50 Consolidation </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge </i>
<i>they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of . </i>
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , chalks , boards </i>


C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Chatting about daily routine</b>
II / <b>Consolidation </b>:


<b>Period 49</b>
1. Grammar


- Ask Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the first


semester and write on the board


1.1 The tenses :


- Present Simple / - Past simple
- Present progressive / - Present perfect
- Simple future


1.2 The form of the verbs


- Modal verbs : can , could , may might


- Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as like
/ dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions


- Have Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples with


Play game


Repeat the tenses they
have learnt .


Listen and copy , then
give some more
examples


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

each one .
2. Exercises :


- Using the posters with some exercises to show .


2.1 Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets +
Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or Gerund


+ Ex 5 / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present perfect
- Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of lass
- Ask some Ss to go to the board to write them on the
board


- Give feedback
<b>Period 50 </b>
1. Grammar
1.2 Comparison
- Comparative
- Superlative
- Like


- (not) as …….. as
- (not) the same as
- different form


1.2 Direct and indirect speech
- Commands


- Requests
- Advice


=> S + told + O +(not) to + V …..
2. Exercises :



- Ex 7 / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison


- Ex 3 / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook )
+ Have Ss work in pairs to do all the exercises
+ Call on some pairs to practice in front of class
+ Give feedback


 <b>Homework </b>:


1. Redo all the exercises and copy
2. Prepare the test :


- Complete these sentences with the suitable words or
phrases in the brackets .


- Complete the conversation


- Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions
below


- Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the
brackets


- Listening comprehension


Repeat and copy .


Work in pairs to the
exercises and exchange


their answers with their
friends .


Listen and copy


Repeat and give some
more examples


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of
class .


Copy down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

Preparing date : 17/12 / 2009


<b>Period 51 Consolidation</b>




<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson . students will be able to remember vocabulary from unit 1
to unit 8 , and structures which they learned .


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Grammar/ Structure: Words


Structures


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book.


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>*Warm up</b> <i><b>Matching</b></i>


Be see collected go worked
Live do seen eat attended
Write been written eaten work
Attend done live collect gone


Ss


<b>Activity1</b> <i><b>I. Change the following sentences to negetive and </b></i>
<i><b>interrogative.</b></i>


1. They have bought food already
2. He gets good grade for History


3. He should practice with his classmates.


4. Mr.Green will send some pictures and postcards.
5. The visitors visited this place last years.


6. Martin ought to buy a new computer.
7. The new mall is open daily.



8. His sisters have collected much waste paper and old
clothes.


9. The students participated in many summer activities.
Susan left on Sunday


T – Ss


<b>Activity2</b> <i><b>II. Write the correct forms of the words in parentheses.</b></i>


1.He is a . . . person. He always . . . his perents.
(help)


2.Clean teeth are . . . teeth. She never touches . . . .
. food.( health)


3.We are . . . about his . . . .( worry; sick)
4.The people at Kim Lien village are very . . .
(friend)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

5.My grandmother is very old now. He walks . . .
(slow)


6.Mary saw an . . . film on TV.(excite)
7.Are those toys . . . for children. (safely)


8.Playing football in the street is very . . . . (danger)
9.She speaks French very . . . I can’t hear anything.
( quick)



10.These students behave . . . They are . . . .
students. (good)


11.Steel is very . . . for building.(use)


12.She knows all the people in her . . . ( neighbor)
13.He had an accident last night. He drove . . . (care)
14.What a . . . party! (bore)


15.Lan is the . . . in my class. ( good)
16.Your garden is . . . than mine. (beauty)
17.Mexico City is the . . . in the world.(big)


Ss


<b>Activity3</b> <i><b>III.Answer the following questions. </b></i>


1. What time will the train leave ?(5:15)


...
2. How long have you studied English? ( for three years)


...
3. Who helps you do this exercise ? (my brother)


...
4. Why didn’t Mary want to go to school ? (have a bad cold)
...
5. What did they have for lunch ? (some bread and butter)



...
6. Who will meet you tomorrow ?(my old teacher)


...
7. How much are those books ? (6 dollars)


...
8. How many pictures are there on the wall ? (one)


...
9. What’s the weather like in June ? (very hot)


...
10.How far is it from here to Vung Tau? (about 50 kilometers)
...
11. Where did you borrow these books ? (from the library)


………


T


Ss


<b>Homework</b> Do the exercise in the exercise book. Ss


Preparing date : 17/12/ 2009


<b>Period 52: </b>

<b> </b>

<b>the first semester test</b>




Prepared by Yen Thanh educational department


Preparing date : 17/12/ 2009


<b>Period 53: </b>

<b> </b>

<b>test correction</b>



<b>I / Aims and Objectives : </b>By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

-Get the correct answers of the test.


- Understand more about how to do a test.


<b>II</b> / <b>Correction</b>


<b>1 . Pre-correcting</b> .


a. Making a few remarks on the test.
b. Giving the paper back .


<b>2. While correcting</b> .
a. giving the answers.


<b>Exercise 1: </b>

8 x 0,25=2,0 mark


1 2 3 4


gave do Is wearing Have known






<b>Exercise 2</b>

:



5 x 0,5 = 2,5


1 . He was born in 1847
2 . He was born in Scotland.


3 . He moved to Canada with his parents.
4 . Yes , he did .


5 . The first telephone was first in commercial use in 1877.


<b>Exercise 3</b>

:

8 x 0,25 =2,0


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


in a In/out on in to Can/could to


<b> Exercise 4: 3 x0,5 =1,5</b>



<b>1 </b>. Bao isn’told enough to go to school by motorbike.
2 . Lan asked to give her the pen.


3 . She has long black hair.


<b>Exercise 5: 4 x 0,5 =2,0</b>



1 . When I was young, I did not use to play volleyball.


2 . Nam likes watching TV very much.


3 . She has learned / learnt English for three years .
4 . Mr. Jones is not rich enough to buy a new house.


<b>3 . Post- correcting</b> .


- Focus on how to do a test .
- Get the test back


<b>4 . Consolidation</b> :


- Preparing for unit 9.


5 6 7 8
watching Have not


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>Period 54 The first semester test </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>Students will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have </i>
<i>learnt to do the test well </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Test paper , chalk , board</i>…..
C / <b>Test </b>


- Deliver the test paper to students .


<b>I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets 2,0 Ps </b>



1 . We must be there( at /before/ between /after )7. 30 and 8 . 15


2. Vietnamese language is different ( as/like / from /with ) English language .
3. She told me ( giving / to give /gave ) you this present .


4. Jane is( as/ like /the most / more ) beautiful than her sister .)
5 . Mary likes( playing/ plays /played /play )the piano .


6. When my uncle was young , he used ( go/ went /going/ to go ) fishing on Sundays
7. He ( left / has left / leaves ) for London a year ago .


8. I have known her ( since / for / at / in ) three years .


<i><b>II / </b><b> </b></i><b>Complete the conversation</b><i><b> : ( 2,0 Ps )</b></i>


A : Can I help you ?


B : I would like ……… this parcel to Hanoi


A : Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ?
B : I am not sure . ……….. is airmail ?


A : I will have ……….. the parcel first . Well , two kilograms . That will be 9,000 dong
B : That is not very cheap . But ………..it airmail .


A : All right .


III / <b>Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in the brackets</b> : ( 2,0 Ps )
1. They ( live ) …………... in Hanoi for 20 years .



2. My aunt ( not go ) ……….. out of her house since she ( buy )………. a color TV
3. The film ( begin ) ………..at 7. 30 pm tonight .


IV/ <i>Read the passage carefully . Then answer the questions below</i> : ( 2,0 Ps )


Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a wonderful night market . In the evening , the
main street is lined with small stands and shops that sell almost anything you can imagine .
Some stands sell jewelry or clothing , others sell traditional Thai crafts and still others sell
fresh fruit and species . It is easy to spend an entire evening just looking at everything . If you
decide to buy something , you will not be disappointed The prices are very reasonable . There
are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai , but the night market is a favorite for many
people .


1. Where is Chiang Mai ?


2. What is Chiang Mai famous for ?


3. What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai ?
4. Are the prices expensive ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>V / </b>Listening comprehension : You are going to listen twice . Check (v) the correct box
for True or False : ( 2,0 Ps )


Statements True False


1. Ba is younger than Lan


2. Lan is shorter than her brother


3. Both Ba and Lan go to school in the morning


4. They love pop music , reading novels .


5. They do not lke playing chess and going swimming in
summer .


6. Ba likes watching war films on TV


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b>The end</b></i>



<b> </b>



Preparing date : 01 / 01 / 2010


<b>The second semester</b>



<b>Unit 9 A first aids course</b>



<b>Period 54 Lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they would </i>
<i>do in the situations which require first - aid</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Text book , cassette , pictures , gap fill chart , drawing ..</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


<b>Time</b> <b>Activities</b> <b>Work arrangement</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the things on
page 80 for 20 seconds . Tell them these things are often
used for first - aid


- Divide the class into two groups .


- Ask Ss to close their books and go t6o the board to
write the names of the things they have just seen from
memory .


- Tell them the group having the most right English
words is the winner


- Have them open the books again and go through the
words in English .


<i>Suggested answers :</i>


1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing
3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack 6. alcohol
- Have them discuss and write down what they would do
in these situations which require first – aid


- Call on some groups to give their answers and correct
<i>Possible answers</i> :


+ A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water / ice to
ease the pain


+ A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol /


medicated oil / sterile dressing


+ A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to stop
the bleeding / tell her to lie down .


+ A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil …
II/ <b>Pre- reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


1. <i>Pre teach Vocabulary</i> :
- (an) ambulance -> drawing


- (an) emergence = cap cuu , tinh trang khan cap
- unconscious (adj) >< conscious (adj)


- to bleed -> the bleeding


-> Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary in their notebooks
* <b>Checking technique</b>: <b>Slap the board </b>


<i>( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board )</i>
2. <i>Gap filling Prediction</i>


- Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board .


<i><b> There was an emergency at Lan</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s school . A student </sub></b></i>


<i><b>…</b><b>..(1)</b><b>…</b><b>. off her bike and hit her head on the road . </b></i>
<i><b>She was </b><b>…</b><b>..(2)</b><b>…</b><b>. but she cut her head and the </b><b>……</b><b>.</b></i>
<i><b>(3)</b><b>…</b><b>. was </b><b>……</b><b>(4)</b><b>…..</b><b> badly . Lan telephoned Bach </b></i>


<i><b>Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an </b><b>……</b><b>(5)</b></i>


<i><b>…</b><b>.. to Quang Trung School . Lan was asked to keep </b></i>
<i><b>the student </b><b>…</b><b>..(6)</b><b>…</b><b>. while waiting for the </b></i>


<i><b>ambulance . </b></i>


- Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps


- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write their
words


III / <b>While - reading</b> :


- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue , then check their predictions
- Give feedback 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut
4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake
* <i>Comprehension questions</i>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and select the topic
covered in the dialogue .


- Have Ss work in groups to write their answers on a
sheet of paper and hand in after finishing .


Whole class


Team work



Whole class


Group work of 4/5 Ss


T – Ss


Whole class
Team work


Individual work
T – Ss


Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
T – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

- Collect Ss ,<sub> papers and give feedback : a- b- c- e- f </sub>


IV / <b>Post - reading</b> :
1. <i>Role play</i>


- Have Ss in turn play the roles to demonstrate the
dialogue .


2. <i>Write - it -up </i>


- Ask Ss to write a story using the information from the
dialogue .


- Tell Ss to begin their story with :



“ Yesterday there was an emergency at ……. “
- Monitor and help Ss with their work


V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 )
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Pair work


Individual work


Preparing date : 2 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 9 A first aids course</b>



<b>Period 55 lesson 2 : Speak + listen</b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to </i>
<i>requests , offers , and promises . </i>


<i>to know how to listen for details about the activities talking place in an emergency room .</i>
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>pictures , charts and posters</i> ..


C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Net work</b>


Po



ssible answers :


- have a snake bite - have a burn - have a cut
- have a bee sting - have a nose bleed ...
II / <b>Pre - speaking</b> : Introduce the topic of the speaking
and some models sentences .


1. Set the scene :


- Ask Ss some questions to elicit the models


a. I want you to get me a bandage . How can I say ?
b. I would like you to come to my party How can I say
c. I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work
before bedtime . How can I say ?


- Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on the
board ( underline the key words )


a. Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ?
b. Would you like to come to my party ?


c. I promise I will finish my homework before bedtime .
=> Concept checking


Group work of 8 – 10
students


T- Ss



T – Ss


<i><b>Situations which </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

- Get Ss to work out the rules for themselves by asking
questions .


- After formulating the model sentences , elicit some
more phrases with the same use from students .
1.1 To make a request :


1.2 To make an offer
1.3 To make a promise
- Ask Ss to copy down .
III / <b>While - speaking</b> :
1. Matching :


- Hang the chart with the statements on the board .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match the
situations with the statements .


1. The girl has a burn on her hand .
2. The girl has a bad fever .


3. The boy has just broken the vase .
4. The boy has a headache .


5. The boy has a snake bite .


- Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5. c


2. Picture Drill :


- Identify the situations in the pictures


Picture a) -> request b) -> offer / request
“ c) -> offer / request d) -> offer
“ e) -> promise


- Ask Ss to work in pairs


+ Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ?
Sure . Here you are


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in
front of class .


IV / <b>Post - speaking</b> :
Pair work ( closed pairs )


- Get Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges


- Monitor and correct , encourage Ss to make sentences
for themselves


- Collect their ideas and write them on the boards
* <i>Suggested answers</i> :


b. A : Can I get you some water / medicine ?
B : Yes, please .



c. A :Can I get you some bandage ?
B :That would be nice


d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get you some
medicine / water ? B : NO , I am fine . Thank you .
e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house
again . B : I hope so .


B- LISTEN


II / <b>Pre- listening</b> : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words


1. Pre teach vocabulary :


- an eye chart ( using picture ) -> eye sight
- a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not a
doctor nor a nurse


- a wheelchair ( using the picture )
-> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair )
- a stretcher ( picture )


- a crutch -> crutches ( picture )


* <b>Checking technique: What and where</b>
2. Matching :


- Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again and
match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in


the box .


T – Ss


Whole class


Group work of 4 / 5 Ss


T – Ss


Pair work
Pair work


T – Ss


T- Ss / individual work
Groupwork of 4/5 Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .


- Give feedback


A -> ambulance D -> eye chart
B -> wheelchair E -> scale
C -> crutches F -> stretcher
III / <b>While </b>–<b> listening</b> :


1. Order Prediction



- Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words .
- Tell Ss they are going to listen to a paragraph about the
activities taking place in an emergency room which
contains the words on the board


- Put the words in the table


Guess key
ambulance


wheelchair
crutches
eye chart
scale
stretcher


3
2
6
4
5
1
- Have Ss copy and guess the order of the words
- Play the tape and ash Ss to listen


- Ask Ss to give their answers and correct
2. True / False statements


- Stick the chart with the statements on the board :
1. A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency


room .


2. The patient,<sub>s head is bandaged</sub>


3. A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting
on it .


4. The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the
different size .


5. The baby,<sub>s mother is trying to stop the nurse from </sub>


weighing her baby .


- Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and check if
they understand the meaning of the statements


- Have Ss work in pairs to decide which of the
statements is true and which is false .


- Play the tape and have Ss listen ( 2 or 3 times )
- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback
1. False ( a parademic not a doctor )


2. True 3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a patient )
4. True 5 . False ( stop her baby from crying )
IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> listening</b> : <i>Write it up </i>


- Have Ss write the story about the activities in the
picture , using the Present Continuous .



“ This is the emergency room in a large hospital ….. “
V <b>/ Homework</b> :


1. Do exercise 3, 4/ 56 ( workbook )
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Individual


Whole class


whole class
Pair work


Individual
Listen and copy


Preparing date : 3 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 9 A first aids course</b>



<b>Period 56 lesson 3 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to read for the </i>
<i>instructions about some more situations requiring first </i>–<i> aid </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards .</i>
<b>C / </b>Procedure


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

- Ask Ss to give nouns for emergencies which require


first – aid and write them on the board ( burn , cut , bee
sting , snake bite , fainting , shock , nose bleed )


- Have Ss choose 4 any 4 words on the board and write
them down on a piece of paper .


- call out the words until someone has ticked all the four
words and shouts “ Bingo “


II / <b>Pre </b>–<b> reading</b> : Introduce the topic of reading
passage and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- to lie flat ( mime / drawing )
- to elevate >< to lower


- a victim : a person who needs first aid
- to overheat : make something too hot
- tissue damage = ton hai mo


- to ease = to stop
- Have Ss copy .


* <b>Checking technique</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>
2. Network


- Draw the network with some examples on the board
- Ask Ss to think of what to do in these emergency
cases .



- Collect and write the students, <sub>ideas on the bard </sub>


III / <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b> :


- Have Ss open their books and read the instructions
page 83


- Ask Ss to go to the board and add the missing
information .


1. Matching :


- Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match tree
Leadings A , B , C to them .


Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d
2. Grid


- Draw the grid on the board .


- Ask Ss to read the instructions again and fill the
information .


- Call on some Ss to the board to write their answers
- Give feedback


Cases Do Don,<sub>t</sub>


Fainting



- Leave the patient lying flat .
- Elevate the patients,<sub> feet or </sub>


lower his / her head .


- Do not force him / her
to sit or stand .


Shock


- Give him / her a cup of tea


when he / she revives . - Do not overheat the victim with
blankets or coat
- Do not give the victim
any food or drink or
drug .


Whole class
Individual


T – Ss


Whole class


Individual


Individual



Pair work


Group work


burn fainting


First-aid


Shock


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

Burns


- Cool the burn immediately
to minimize the tissue
damage .


- Put the affected part under a
running cold tap .


- Ease the pain with ice or
cold water packs .


- Cover the burned area with
a thick sterile dressing .


- Have Ss copy the grid in their notebooks .
IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing how to
give first aid .



- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Let Ss do the exercises 6,7 in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .




Preparing date : 7 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 9 A first aids course</b>



<b>Period 57 Lesson 4 : Write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a </i>
<i>thank </i>–<i> you note . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Posters , drawing</i>
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


I / <b>Warm up : Shark attack </b>


( Revised words : lie flat , elevate , lower , victim , ease )


 Lead in the new lesson .


II <b>/ Pre </b>–<b> writing</b> : Introduce the topic of the writing


and some new words to Ss


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- to thank Sb for sth


Eg : She thanked me for helping her
- to cheer Sb up = to make Sb feel happier


T- Ss


T- Ss
- to come over ( translation )


Have Ss copy


* <b>Checking technique</b> : <b>slap the board</b>
2. <i>Set the scene</i>


- Ask Ss to close their books and listen “ Nga was sick
and she had to go to the hospital . After she left the
hospital , she wrote a thank – you note to Hoa . Why
and what did she write ? “


3. True / False Predictions


- Hang the poster with the statements on the board
a. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some come candy .
b. Hoa,<sub>s gift cheered Nga up .</sub>


c. Nga ,<sub>d like Hoa to see her at the hospital .</sub>



d. Nga is very bored now .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

e. Nga writes the letter at the hospital .
- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict .


- Get S to give their predictions and write them on the
board .


- Ask Ss to look at the letter and complete it with the
right verb forms .


- Monitor and help Ss with the tense forms .
- Call on some Ss to give their answers and give
feedback .


- Ask Ss to read the whole letter and check if their
prediction are right or not .


<i>Answer key</i> :


1. False -> flower ( not candy ) 2. True
3. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
4. True


5. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
III / <b>While </b>–<b> writing :</b> <i><b>Questions and answers</b></i>


- Tell Ss they are going to write a thank – you note to a
friend and invite him / her to go on a picnic with them .


- Ask Ss to read the questions carefully to answer orally
- Have Ss practice speaking to each other .


- Monitor and correct .


- Get Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to make it
a thank – you note .


- Tell Ss to write their letters in their exercise
notebooks .


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> writing</b> : <i><b>Exhibition </b></i>


- Divide the class into 4 groups and choose a letter
randomly in each group .


- Compare their letters and correct .


- Call on some more Ss to read their letters for class
- Give feedback and correct .


V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Ask Ss to use the same format to write another letter
to another friend for another occasion .


2. Do the exercises in the workbook .
* <b>Feedback</b> :


Individual


Individual


T – Ss


T – Ss
Pairwork
Individual


Groupwork
Individual
Teacher
Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>



Preparing date : 10 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 9 A first aids course</b>



<b>Period 58 lesson 5 : language focus </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to use in </i>“
<i>order to , so as to to indicate purpose , Future simple and Modal will to make requests , </i>“ “ “
<i>offers and promises . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , chalks , boards …</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up: Bingo </b>



=> lead in the new lesson
II / <b>Language focus</b>
1. <b>Grammar notes</b> :


- Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of “ In order to /
so as to + V infinitive “ “ Future simple “ and “ Modal
Will “


- Summarize and hang the charts with models and uses
of them .


+ Negative purposes :


<i>In order not to + V / So as not to + V</i>
Eg : You have to take your warm clothes with you in
order not to get bad cold.


- Have Ss copy .
2. <b>Exercises : </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the books and do the exercises .
- Do them orally first , then copy them in their exercise
notebooks


Ex 1 : <b>Matching </b>


- Ask Ss to read the example aloud and ask them to
match one part of a sentence from column A with
another part in column B



- Get Ss to exchange their answers to correct for each
other .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback


<b> 1- f , 2- c , 3- b </b>
<b>4 </b>–<b> e , 5- a , 6- d</b>
Ex 2 : <b>Future simple</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and
exchange their roles.


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback


<b>1. will 2. will 3. won,<sub>t </sub></b>


<b> 4. Shall 5. will 6. ,<sub> ll</sub></b>


Ex 3: <b>Making requests , offers and promises with </b>
<b>will </b>


- Explain the aims of the exercise


- Ask Ss to read each situation and work in pairs to
complete the dialogue.


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :



a. Will you open the window , please , Nga ?
b . will you give it to me , please ?


c. Will you answer the telephone , please ?


Teacher – Ss


Teacher – Ss


Individual


Individual


Pairwork


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

d. Will you turn on the TV , please , Nga ?


e. Will you pour a glass of water for me , please ?
f. Will you get me a cushion , please ?


Ex 4 : <b>Work with a partner</b>
- Explain the aims of the exercise
- Ask Ss to read the example aloud .


- Get Ss to read all the words in the box . Be sure Ss to
understand the meaning of them and each situation .
- Have Ss work in pairs to make requests , offers or
promises



- Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback


b. Will you paint the door , please ?
I will paint the door tomorrow .
c . Will you study harder , please ?
I will study harder .


d. Will you carry the bag for me , please ?
Shall I carry the bag for you ?


e. Will you hang the washing , please ?
Shall I hang the washing for you ?
f. Will you cut the grass , please ?
I will cut the grass for you .
III / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Let Ss copy all the exercises in the notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


* <b>Feedback </b>:


Individual


Pair work


Individual


Preparing date : 11 / 1 / 2010



<b>Unit 10 : Recycling</b>



<b>Period 59 lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read</b>


A / <b>Aims and objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to do something to protect</i>
<i>the environment and save natural resources . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Textbook , posters , cassette , 6 flashcards , a chart …</i>
C /<b> Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Brainstorming</b> <i><b>(Getting started)</b></i>
Reuse plastic bags


Group work of 4/5 teams
Ways to reduce


the amount of
garbage


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

- Ask Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of
garbage they produce .


- Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups
- Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish
and the team having the most good ideas is the winner .
- Give feedback


( Use cloth bags , use tree leaves to wrap things , make
garbage into fertilizer , make vegetable matter into


animal food … )


 Lead in to new lesson .


II / <b>Pre </b>–<b> reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- representative (n) = dai dien


- to protect = to keep so/ sth safe from danger .
-> to protect so / sth from so / sth


- natural resource (n) : coal mines , oil / gold / mineral
deposits


- to recycle “ to make sth already used able to be used
again .


- to contact = to communicate with so by telephone or
letter .


-> Have Ss copy .
II / While – reading :


1. Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs .
- Monitor and help Ss with their work



- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the
questions .


- Give feedback


a. Reduce means not buying products which are over
packed .


b. We can reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic
bottles and old plastic bags .


c. Recycle means not just throwing things away . Try
and find another use for them .


d. We can look for information on recycling things by
having a contact with an organization like Friends of the
Earth , going to the local library or asking your family
and friends .


e. We should not use plastic bags because when we
throw them away , they could stay very long and could
not be self- destroyed .


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> :


<b> Discussion </b>


<i><b>How to protect our environment ?</b></i>


“ ”



- Ask Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this topic .
- Write their ideas on the board into a list


- Give feedback , correct and hove them copy .
V <b>/ Homework</b> :


1. Write the questions and full answers in your exercise
notebook .


2. Do the exercises ( 1,2 ) in the Workbook .
* <b>Feedback</b> :


Individual


Teacher – Ss


Teacher – Ss


Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>



Preparing date : 13 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 10 : Recycling</b>



<b>Period 60 lesson 2 : Speak + listen </b>



A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice giving and </i>


<i>responding to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost . </i>
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Picture , a mapped dialogue chart , realia , cassette …</i>


C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Kim,<sub>s game </sub></b>


* Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers ,
books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars , plastic
bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable matter ,
clothes , shoes , school bags …


* <b>Speak </b>


I / <b>Pre- speaking</b> : Introduce the topic of the speaking
and some new words to students .


1. Pre-teach vocabulary :


- Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make their
plants or trees grow well .


-> to fertilize


- Compost (n) : What do you call the fertilizer made
from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ?


-> compost heap
- Fabric (n) = material



- Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ?
+ Have Ss copy in their notebooks .


 <b>Checking technique</b> : <b>Bingo </b>
2. Dictation list :


- Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for items
and put them into the right groups .


- Draw the table on the words and put them in the right
columns .


- Model some words .


- Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up
- After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give their
answers .


- Read the words again and correct


<b>Group</b> <b>Items</b>


Paper used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard boxes
Glass ( bottles , glasses , jars )


Plastic (Plastic bags , plastic bottles )
Metal ( food cans , drinking tins ..)
Fabric Clothes ( cloth bags , material )


Whole class


Team work


Teacher – Ss


Individual


Individual
Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

Leather ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags )
Vegetable


matter Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits )


II / <b>While </b>–<b> speaking</b> :
Mapped dialogue :


- Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board .
- Elicit the exchanges from students


- Have some pairs practice each exchange before going
on to another exchange .


- After fishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to
demonstrate the whole dialogue .


a. Open pairs :


- Ask some pairs to practice in front of class .
b. Closed pairs :



- Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with
the words in the dictation list


- Monitor and correct .


A B


Which group ( do clothes )
belong to ?


What can we do with
( those clothes ) ?
Is / are ( fruit vegetable
matter ) ?


What will we do with
(it ) ?


Put ( them ) in fabric
We can ( recycle them and
make them into paper or
shopping bags .


That is right


We make ( it into compose
and fertilizer our field . )
IV / <b>Post speaking</b> : <b>Listening </b>



Multiple choice :


- Tell Ss they are going to listen to an expert who gives
the instructions to make compost .


- Ask Ss to open their books and read the multiple
choice questions


- Have them guess the answers


- Turn on the tape 2 or 3 times , Ss listen and do the
exercise .


- Get Ss to give their answers and correct
Answers : a. A b. B c. A d. B


- Have them copy
V / <b>Home work</b> :


1. Copy down the dialogue , replacing the information .
2. Do the exercises in the work book.


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Teacher –Ss


Pair work


Individual



Individual


Preparing date : 15 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 10 : Recycling</b>



<b>Period 61 Lesson 3 : Read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in the
Present Simple


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : word square chart . pictures , drawing ..
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>V</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>M</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>T</b>


<b>N</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>G</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>B</b> <b>A</b> <b>G</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b>


<b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>D</b> <b>O</b> <b>P</b> <b>P</b> <b>U</b> <b>R</b> <b>E</b>


<b>E</b> <b>J</b> <b>U</b> <b>E</b> <b>Y</b> <b>I</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>S</b> <b>C</b>


<b>L</b> <b>U</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>P</b> <b>A</b> <b>P</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b>


<b>O</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b>


<b>P</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>U</b> <b>U</b> <b>L</b>


<b>E</b> <b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>R</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b>



<b>R</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>K</b>


<b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>G</b> <b>H</b> <b>G</b> <b>I</b> <b>J</b> <b>L</b>


- Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there are
12 hidden words .


- Divide the class into 4 groups .


- Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper and
hand in when they finish


- Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the
winner .


Answer key :


environment , garbage , pure , used
paper , protect .
envelope , dust , green tree , can ,
plastic , paper bag ,
reduce , reuse , recycle
II / <b>Pre </b>–<b> reading</b> :Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- tire (n) : using picture
- pipe (n) : using drawing


- deposit (n) : khoan tien gui vao mot tai khoan


- to refill = to fill something empty again
- to melt >< to freeze


- Get Ss to copy in their notebooks .


* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>
2. Open prediction


- Tell Ss they are going to read a page in a newspaper
giving some recycling facts to protect the environment .
- Ask them to look at the board and guess what they are
going to read .


+ What do people do with used things ?
+ What can they make from them ?


- Call on some Ss to read their guesses on the board
Car ties -> …………..


Milk bottles ->………
Glass -> …………..
Drink cans -> …………..


Household and garden waste -> ……… ….
III / <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b> :


1. Grid


- Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it
- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text .



- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of recycling facts
mentioned in the text .


- Call on some Ss to write the information in the grid on
the board .


Answer Key :


Used things Recycling Facts
Car tires


Milk bottles


are recycled to make pipes and
floor recoverings


are cleaned and refilled


Group work of 4 teams


T – Ss


Whole class


Individual


Whole class
Pair work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

Glass
Drink cans
Household and
garden waste


(with milk )


is broken up , melted and made
into new glassware


are brought back for recycling
is made into compost .


2. Comprehension questions


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Get them to compare their answers with their friends .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .


- Give feedback


a. People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles .
b. The glass is broken up , melted and made into new
glassware .


c. The Oregon government made a new law that there
must be a deposit on all drink cans . The deposit is
returned when people bring the cans back for recycling .
d. Compost is made from household and garden waste .


e. If we have a recycling story to share , we can call or
fax the magazine at 5 265 456.


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> :


- Ask Ss to look at their books and complete the
sentences to make a list of recycled things .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
=> The sentences they have read are the passive .
Passive Form in the present Simple


<b>S + am/ is / are + Past participle</b>


- It is used when the subject is affected by the action of
the verb .


- How to change an active sentence to a passive voice :
Active S V O


Passive S + be + PII by O
eg : I love you


You are loved by me
Have Ss copy


 Change these sentences into the passive
1. Lan like pop music .


2. They play table tennis every day



3. We do these exercises in the notebooks .
4. He feeds 5 chickens .


5. She buy a lot of food .


- Call on some Ss to read their completed sentences in
front of class .


- Give feedback


1. Pop music is liked by Lan .
2. Table tennis is played every day


3. These exercises are done in the notebooks by us .
4. Five chickens are fed by him


5. A lot of food is bought by her .
V / <b>Homework :</b>


1. Copy down all the passive sentences in their note
books .


2. Do the exercises in the workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .


* <b>Feedback</b> :


Pair work


Individual



Whole class


Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>



Preparing date : 18 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 10 : Recycling</b>



<b>Period 62 lesson 4 : Write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a set of </i>
<i>instructions , using the sequencing .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>drawing ,, mime , picture</i>…
C / <b>Procedure </b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Lucky numbers</b>


- Write 9 numbers on he board from 1 to 9
1. Lucky number


2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people speak English
everywhere “


3. Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons are liked by
most children “



4. Lucky number
5. Lucky number


6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We do not use
things carefully . “


7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are candies liked by
the children ? “


8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr Han teaches
Maths . “


9. Say this sentence in the passive “ Vegetables do not
eat meat . “


- Divide the class into 2 teams .


II <b>/ Pre- writing</b> : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to Ss


1. Pre-teach vocabulary :


- to soak : put sth in liquid for a time so that it becomes
completely wet .


- to mash : mime


- wire mesh (n) : luoi dien
- bucket (n) : drawing
-> Have Ss copy down .



* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>Slap the board</b>
2. Ordering prediction :


- Set the scene : tell Ss they are going to read a text
about how to recycle used paper .


- Put the verbs on the board randomly in a flow chart
- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict the order of the
actions


<b>soak dry pull out mix press mash </b>
1 2 3
4 5 6


- Call on about 2 pairs to write their answers on the
board .


- Explain the process of recycling , using mimes or
Vietnamese and correct .


- Feedback


<b> 1. soak 2. mash 3. mix</b>
<b> 4. pull out 5. press 6. dry</b>
III / <b>While </b>–<b> writing</b> :


- Ask Ss to open their books , read the text and fill in the
verbs



- Monitor and correct the exercise in the text book .
- Feedback


<b> 1. use 2. mix 3. place 4. press </b>
<b> 5. wrap 6. wait 7. dry</b>


* <b>Recall</b>


- Ask Ss to close their books


- Write the sequencing on the board and have Ss to
practice speaking first


- Call on Ss to say the sentences from memory .


- Get Ss to write the text in brief using the sequencing .
- Monitor and help Ss with their work .


- Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class .
- Feedback


Team work


Listen and copy


Teacher – Ss
Team work


Teacher



Group work of 4/ 5 Ss


Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

First , soak old newspaper in a bucket overnight .
Then , mash the paper by a wooden spoon .
Next , mix the mashed paper with water .


After that , use a wire mesh to pull the mixture out , put
it on the cloth and press it down firmly .


Finally , take the mesh out of the cloth & dry it in the
sun .


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> writing</b> : <b>Ordering pictures</b>
- Stick the pictures on the board randomly


- Ask Ss to listen and work in groups to rearrange the
pictures according to the instructions on how to prepare
the tealeaves .


- Read the instructions aloud


a. First take the used tealeaves from the tea pot .
b. Next scatter the tealeaves on a tray .


c. Then dry the leaves in the sun .


d. Finally , put the dry leaves in a pot for future use .
V / <b>Homework</b> :



1. Write the instructions on how to make a thing you
have ever made using the sequencing


2. Prepare the next lesson .


Group work


Individual


Preparing date : 19 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 10 : Recycling</b>



<b>Period 63: Lesson 5 : Language focus </b>


A / <b>Aims and objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in </i>
<i>Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives</i> .


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Cardboards , poster , handouts ….</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Questions game</b>


- Call on a student to go to the board and give him or her a
job name .


- Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking yes-no
questions



- The chosen student can only answer yes or no


- Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a point
and take the place of the last chosen student .


Example questions :


- Do you get a big salary ?
- Do you wear uniform ?
II / <b>Language focus</b>


1. <b>The passive forms</b>


1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple
S + am / is / are + past participle


=> It is used when the subject is affected by the action of
the verb .


Ex 1 : Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :


+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to
put them in the correct order according to the instructions
+ Call on some groups to give their answers .


+ Give feedback <b>a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6</b>


Individual



Teacher – Ss


Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

- Writing :


+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the
board and write their sentences


+ Correct and give feedback


1.2 <b>Passive Form in the Future Simple</b>


<b>S + will / shall + be + past participle</b>
- Have Ss copy down


- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the
gaps , using the Passive


- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct
1. … will be shown


2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished …. 4.
Will … be made … ?


2. <b>Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause</b>
2.1. <b>It + be + adjective + to infinitive</b>



Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
Ex 3 : Complete the sentences


- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and
correct


2.2 . <b>S + be + adj + that / noun clause</b>


Example : We are delighted that you passed the English
exam .


- Get Ss to copy .


Ex 4 : Complete the letter


- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .


A B Key


1. relieved (a)
2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)


a. xin chuc mung
b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom



1.d
2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary


- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the
words in the box


- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct


0. are delighted
1. was happy
2. am relieved
3. is afraid
4. Are … sure …
5. am certain


- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,<sub>s grandparents</sub>


are delighted that he passed his English exam ……”
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .


* <b>Feedback</b> :


Pair work



Teacher – Ss


Individual


Whole class


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Whole class


Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

Preparing date : 23 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 11 Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<b> Period 64 lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some expressions </i>
<i>to express their interest </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Cassette , 2 charts .</i>
C <b>/ Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : <b>Jumbled words</b>


- Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board



- Ask each team to connect the words to make the right
phrases for places of interest and write them on the board
as fast as possible


=> Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple Literature
, Nha rong Harbor .


* <b>Getting Started</b> :


- Ask Ss to open their books and match the names with the
pictures


- Call on some Ss to give their answers
a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor
c. The Temple Literature


d. Ha Long Bay


- Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud .
II / <b>Pre- reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .


1. Pre- teach Vocabulary :


- Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is
grown in one season .


- Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar )
- Water buffalo (n) : con trau



- forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes
Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N


Ex : a3 – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old – boy


* <b>Checking vocabulary : Bingo</b>
2. Guiding questions :


- Set the scene and put the chart with questions on the
board


a. where does Hoa meet The Jones ?


b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam?
c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ?


d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ?
e. What would Tim like to do ?


- Ask Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes
- Have Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue
- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to give their answers


- Feedback :


Team work


Individual



Listen and copy
Teacher – Ss


individual and choral


Whole class


Individual
Pair work


<b>Famous places in </b>
<b>Viet Nam</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport
b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi


d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies , corn
and sugar cane fields


e. He would like to take a photo .
III / <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b> :


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False
- Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to answer ,
then have them correct the false sentences and get them to
write in their notebooks .


a. T b. T d. T e . T
c. F -> … in a taxi



f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are
grown around Ha Noi .


- Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in
front of class


- Correct their pronunciation


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> : <b>Discussion </b>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them
and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the
situations mentioned below .


* to express interest :


- I,<sub>d like you to meet my parents </sub>…<sub>.</sub>


- It is nice to meet you ….
- It is great to be in Viet Nam .
- I would to sit with Tim …..
* to express a request :


- Would you mind sitting in the front seat …
- Would you mind if I took a photo ?


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to give


some examples .


2. Do the exercises in the workbooks .


Whole class


Individual


Individual




Preparing date : 24 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 11 Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<b>Period 65 Lesson 2 : speak + listen</b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to </i>
<i>formal requests using mind and make suggestions .</i>


listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map .
B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>a mapped dialogue chart .. Cassette , a route map</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> : revision the structures
Would you mind+ V ing


Would you mind if I + Vp1



II / <b>Pre- speaking</b> : Introduce the topic of the speaking
and some structures


1. Pre- teach structures :
- Set the scene :


Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Jones
and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit
the sentences from Ss .


<b>Model sentences</b> :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

1. A :Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi ?
B : No problem .


2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ?
B : Not at all .


=> Used to make and respond to formal requests
Form :


1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …?


2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple tense) …?
Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple tense ) ..?
<b>Responses</b> :


 Agreement:


No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at all . /


Please do . / Please go head .


 Disagreement :


I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible
I,<sub>d prefer you did not . / I</sub>,<sub>d rather you did not . </sub>


.III / <b>While </b>–<b> speaking :</b>
- Ask Ss to work in pairs


+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the
exchanges


+ Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the
exchanges


- Give feedback
Mapped dialogue


You Tourist officer


Excuse me !


I would like to visit a
market. Would you
mind suggesting one ?


That sounds


interesting . Thank


you .


Yes ?
Not at all .


How about going to Thai
Binh Market ?


It opens from about
5 am to pm .
You are welcome .


+ Open pairs : Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue
. + Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the
information / 101 to practice other dialogues .


Group 1 : Markets Group 2 : Museums
Group3 : Restaurants Group 4 : Stamps
Group 5 : Zoo and Botanical Garden
IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> speaking</b> :


- Call on some volunteers from each group to practice in
front of class .


- Rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books
II / <b>Pre- listening</b> : Introduce the topic of the listening and
some new words


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- Highway ( n)



- Tourist information center (n)


2. Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around Ha
Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in
the maps . Listen to them and match the places to the
correct positions on the maps “


- Have Ss guess their correct positions on the map


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them
on the board.


III / <b>While </b>–<b> listening</b> :


- Ask Ss to list the places on the maps .


Teacher – Ss


Whole class


Pair work
Teacher – Ss
Pair work


Individual


Individual
Individual
Teacher – Ss


Whole class
Work in group
Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

- Play the tape 2 or 3 times


- Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the
correct answers


<b>Answer key</b> :


a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station
d) pagoda e) temple


- Play the tape once more to check the answers
( pause at some important paragraph )


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> listening</b> :


- Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape .
- Correct their pronunciation


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Do the exercises in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Pair work
Individual



Whole class


Listen and copy
Preparing date : 26 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 11 Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<b>Period 66 Lesson 3 : Read </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get the information </i>
<i>from simple tourist advertisements . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Cassette , Pictures of cities , 2 posters , gap fill chart …</i>
C <b>/ Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Hangman </b>
<b> Networks: </b>Landscapes in Viet Nam<b> </b>


Nha Trang Da Lat Ha Long Bay
II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .


1. <b>Pre </b>–<b> teach vocabulary</b> :


- accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in
- giant (adj ) = huge / very big



- slope (n)


- jungle (n) = a very thick forest
- limestone (n) = da voi


- florist (n) : a person who sells flowers
- to import >< to export


* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>What and where</b>
II / <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b> :


1. Grid :


- Ask Ss to read the advertisements about the resorts and
check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid


- Get Ss to work in pairs to compare their answer
- Call on some Ss to give their answers


Answer Key :
<b>Nha Trang</b> :


Team work


Individual


Teacher – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels , local transport ,
tourist attractions .



<b>Da Lat</b> :


Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , tourist attractions
<b>Sa Pa</b> :


Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes tourist
attractions , villages .


<b>Ha Long Bay</b> :


World Heritage , tourist attractions , sand beaches ,
railways , hotels , caves , locals transport .


- Have Ss copy down
2. Matching :


- put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match the
words or phrases in Column A to column B


A B


1. Nha Trang
2. Da lat
3. Sa Pa
4. Ha long Bay
5. Nha Rong
Harbor


a. tribal villages , mountain climbing


b. The place where President Ho Chi
Minh left Viet Nam in 1911.


c. Swimming and sunbathing .
d. Oceanic Institute


e. Flower gardens .


- Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to connect
the words


Answer Key :


<b>1. d 2.e 3.a 4.c 5.b </b>
3. Grid


- Get Ss to open their books , read the text on page 105
and check (v) the boxes .


- Monitor and correct .


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> : <b>Role play</b>


- Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the information
in the text .


+ Write the model on the board .
A : Where should ( Andrew ) go ?
B : He should go to ( Sa Pa ) .
A : Why ?



B : Because ( he studies tribes and he likes mountain –
climbing )


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking .
- Monitor and correct


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Redo the exercises and copy in their notebooks .
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Whole class


Individual


Individual


Pair work
Teacher – Ss


Pair work


Individual


<b> </b>



<b> </b>Preparing date : 29 / 1 / 2010


<b>Unit 11 Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<b>Period 67 lesson 4 : write </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a </i>
<i>narrative , using a guided composition .</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>pictures , gap fill charts , cardboards</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> :


<b>Hangman</b>


<b> S t o r y</b>
<b> Lead in</b>


II / <b>Pre- writing</b> : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to Ss .


1. Pre – teach Vocabulary
- canoe (n) : using picture


- to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n)
- to hire : thue muon


- to overturn : lat up / lat do



- to rescue = to save somebody ,<sub>s life from danger </sub>


+ Get Ss to copy down .


* <b>Checking vocabulary</b> : <b>Slap the board</b>


2. Ordering statements : Setting the scene “<i> Last week , </i>
<i>while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family had quite </i>
<i>an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake . What </i>
<i>did they do and what happened to them ? </i>“


- Ask Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and
rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story .
- Call on some pairs to give their answers and correct .
- Get some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and
correct pronunciation errors .


- Give feedback : <b>c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e</b>
III / <b>While </b>–<b> writing</b> :


1. Explanation :


- Have Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess the
meaning of the new words .


- Explain the meanings of these words
+ to stumble : truot chan


+ to go off : vang ra
+ to realize : nhan ra


- Get Ss to copy
2. Ordering pictures :


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange the
events in the correct chronological order to make it a story
.


- Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct .
- Give feedback : <b>d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g</b>
3. Write – it – up :


- Ask Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and the
given words to write the story about Uyen .


- Monitor and help Ss with words or structures while they
are writing .


* Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a
narrative .


- Ask them to exchange their writings to correct for each
other .


- Call on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class
- Give feedback :


<i>Uyen had a day to remember last week . she had a </i>
<i>math exam on Friday but she got up late . She realized </i>
<i>her alarm clock did not go off . As he was leaving home , </i>
<i>it started to rain heavily . Uyen tried to run as fast as she </i>


<i>could . Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell onto</i>
<i>the road . Her school bag went into a pool of water and </i>
<i>everything got wet . Strangely , the rain stopped as she got</i>
<i>to her classroom . Luckily , Uyen had enough time to </i>


Ss


Teacher – Ss


Whole class
Teacher – Ss


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Whole – class
Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<i>finish her exam . </i>
IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> writing</b> :


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story in
front of class .


- Copy the story in their notebooks .
V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Learn by heart all new words and copy in their
notebooks .



2. Work in groups of 4 writing a story to tell the class in
the next lesson .


3. Prepare the next lesson .


Individual


Individual


Individual





Preparing date : 01 / 02 / 2010


<b>Unit 11 Traveling around Viet Nam</b>



<b>Period 68 lesson 5 : Language focus </b>


A/ <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present and Past </i>
<i>participles to describe things and people and the requests with Would / Do you mind if </i>“


<i>..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing </i> <i>? </i>


<i>…</i> <i>… “</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Pictures , cardboards . gap fill chart –</i> <i>…</i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :



I / <b>Warm up</b> <b>Memory game </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 109 carefully for 20
seconds and close their books .


- Tell them the team having the most right words is the
winner .


- Have Ss open their books again , go through the words
and correct .


Answer Key :


box , lamp truck , flowers , elephant , bear , rabbit
II / <b>Language focus</b>


1. Language focus 1 :
* Pre-teach :


- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108
and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at
Quang Trung school are in the school yard . What are they
doing ? “


- Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct .
T : What is Mr Quang doing ?


Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs .
T : What is Miss Lien doing ?



Ss : She is carrying a bag .


Whole class
Team work


Whole class


Teacher – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

T : ( Nam )


Ss : ( standing next to Miss Lien / talking to Miss Lien )
T : ( Ba )


Ss : ( sitting under the tree / reading a book )
T : ( Lan )


Ss : ( standing by the table )
T : ( Nga and Hoa )


Ss : ( playing chess )


 Model sentences :


The man <b>walking</b> up the stairs is Mr Quang
( present participle phrase )


Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle


Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to


qualify a noun with active meaning


- Have Ss copy
* Practice :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is , using
the information above


<b>Example</b> : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang
- Correct and feedback


2. Language focus 2 :


* Pre –teach : <b>Matching </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the
picture / 109 to do the matching


<b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>Key</b>


1. box
2. truck
3. lamp
4. doll
5. flowers
6. toys


a. wrap in
b. dress in
c. recycled from


d. keep in


e. made in
f. paint


1. f
2. c
3. e
4. b
5. a
6. d
- Ask Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer the
questions :


- Where is the old lamp made in ?
- What color is the box painted ?
- What is truck recycled from ?
- What color is the doll dressed in ?
- What are the flowers wrapped in ?
- Where are the toys kept ?


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the
questions


=> Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ?
Model Sentences :


The old lamp <b>made</b> in China is five dollars .
( past participle phrase )



Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle
Irregular verb


Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to
qualify a noun with passive meaning .


- Have Ss copy
* Practice :


- Ask Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and
answer


1. T : How much is the box painted green ?
St: The box painted green is one dollar


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the
questions ( Using the information in the matching )


Choral -> individual


Whole class


Individual


Pair work


Teacher – Ss


Choral -> individual



Teacher – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class .
3. Language focus 3 :


3.1 Presentation :


- Ask Ss to repeat the models sentences :


Would you mind if + Verb ( in Past simple tense …) ?
Do you mind if + Verb ( in present simple tense …) ?
Do you mind / would you mind + verb – ing …?
+ Agreement :


No , I do not mind . / No , of course not . / Not at all . /
Please do . / Please go ahead .


- Disagreement :


I,<sub>d prefer you did not . / I</sub>,<sub>d rather you did not . </sub>


=> Meaning : Xin ban cam phien …
- Get Ss to copy .


3.2 Practice :


<b>Cardboard Drill</b>


- Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including checks (v) and
crosses (x)



a. move / car (v) c. get / coffee (x)
b. put out / cigarette (v) d. wait / moment (x)
Model : T : Would you mind moving your car ?
Ss : No , of course not .


- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it and correct .


+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the
class .


+ Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice
- Go on until the last cue


4. language focus 4 :
4.1 Gap fill


- Put the gap – fill chart on the board .


- Ask Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the
gaps .


<b>turned off </b>–<b> explain </b>–<b> telling </b>–
<b>ask</b>


1. Would you mind …… me something about it ?
2. Do you mind if I …… you a question ?


3. Would you please …. this new word to me ?
4. Would you mind if I ….. the television ?



Answer Key : 1.telling 2.ask 3.explain 4. turned off
4.2 Ordering pictures


- Ask Ss to write the numbers and look at the pictures ,
listen to the situations and order the pictures ( 1-> 6 )
1. turn on the stereo 2. watch TV while eating
3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting
5. turn on the air – conditioner 6. smoke


- Ask Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e 6.b
- Get Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to demonstrate
the exchanges based on the models below the pictures .
Listen and correct their mistakes .


V / <b>Homework</b> :


1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .


Teacher – Ss


Whole class


Teacher – Ss
Pair work


Individual


Whole class



Pair work


Individual




Preparing date : 04/02 / 2010

<b>period 69</b>

:

<b>consolidation</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<b>*Aim</b> : To help Ss practice in use passive form,–ed and – ing participles,requests
with : Would / Do you mind if...?, Would / Do you mind + Ving...?


<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :


- consolidate some new points of grammar they have learnt.


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: Review
- Grammar/ Structure:
- Passive form


- –ed and – ing participles


- requests with : Would / Do you mind if...?, Would / Do you mind + Ving....?


<b>*Teaching method</b>:Communicative method



<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm - up</b> I.Chatting.


-Would you mind handing your book?
-Do you mind if I sit here?


-Is this your bag made from leather?
-Are your shoes recycled from rubber?


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b> <i><b>II.Exercise 1: Rewrite the following sentences beginning</b></i>
<i><b>with the words given without changing the meaning of </b></i>
<i><b>the first one.</b></i>


A,People are digging a well behind the house.
A well...
b,This present was given to me on my birthday.
They ...
c,Can I use your book?


Would you...
d,Do you mind taking me home?



Can you...?
e,It is exciting to take part in this game.


To take...
-Ss work in pairs to do the exercise.


-Ss give feedback.
-Correct together.
*Answer key:


a,A well is being dug behind their house.
b,They gave me this present on my birthday.
C,Would you mind if I used your book?
D,Can you take me home,please?


E,To take part in this game is exciting.
-Elicit grammar points from ss.


+Passive voice : -Form


-Steps to change on active sentence into
passive and whereas.


-Note : irregular verbs/objects.
+Would you mind/Do you mind + V-ing ...?
Would you mind if I +V-ed...?


Do you mind if I + V...?
+It’s....To do....= To do...is..



<i><b>III.Exercise 2: Fill in the brackets with </b></i>–<i><b>ed or </b></i>–<i><b>ing </b></i>
<i><b>participles</b></i>.


T - Ss


Ss


T - Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

1,The meal (cook) was very tasty.


2,The woman (look) at the lake is my teacher.
3,The shirt (buy) yesterday was too big for me.
4,The buffolo (graze) in the field is mine.


5,I don’t like the gift (give) by him.
-Ss work in pairs.


-Ss give feedback.
-Correct together.
*Answer key:


1,cooked 2,looking 3,bought 4,grazing 5,given
-Elicit the use of –ed and –ing participles from ss.


<i><b>IVExercise 3.Find and correct the mistakes .</b></i>


a,I’d like go to Australia.


B,We took care with their car for a week.


C,It’s boring talking to him.


D,I study English so as I want to talk to foreigners.
E,The old school is use as a sports center.


-Ss work in pairs.
-Ss give feedback.
-Correct together.


*Answer key: a,go – to go; b,care with – care of ;
c,talking – to talk ; d,want to – can ; e,use – used.
-note ss the mistake they made.


.


Ss


T


Ss


T


<b>Consolida</b>
<b>tion</b>
<b>&Homework</b>


-Sum up the content of the lesson.
-Ss prepare for the test



Ss






<b> </b>Preparing date : 20 / 02 / 2010


<b>Period 70 </b>

<b> </b>

<b>witten Test 3</b>



<b>A </b>

/

<b>Aims and Objectives</b>

: <i>Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they </i>
<i>have learnt to do the test well . </i>


B /

<b>Teaching aids</b>

: <i>Papers , chalks and boards . </i>


<b>C / </b>

Matrix :


<b>Contents</b> <b>R</b>ecognizing Understanding <b> Using</b>


<b> Total</b>
result selfthinking result selfthinking result selfthinking


<b>1 .language </b>


<b>focus</b> <b>5 0.5</b> <b>5 0.5</b> <b>10 5.0</b>


<b>2 . reading</b> <b>5 0.5</b> <b>5 2.5</b>


<b>3. writing</b> <b>5 2.5</b>



<b>5 2.5</b>
<b> total</b> <b>5 2.5 10 5.0</b> <b>5 2.5</b> <b>20</b>


<b> 10.0</b>


<b>D / T</b>

est



I – Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.


1. Do you mind if I (close) ………the window?
2. The glass (break)………..in to small pieces.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

3. Yesterday, I went to Roc market in order to (buy)………..……some flowers.
4. This tree (plant )………...by my grandfather yesterday.
5. I (give)………..you a dictionary on your next birthday.I promise.
6. Do you mind(give) ...me some water ?


7. motor bikes (make)……….…………in China are cheap.
8. The man (sit ) ...next to me is a doctor.
9. I am happy( hear)... ………that good new .
10. Would you mind if I (move)...this box?
<b>II. Read the text and answer the questions.</b>


Everyday of the year throughout the world, about twenty million paper bags and
newspapers are served and thrown away.


Making paper requires a lot of wood pulp and the work of millions of workers. Many
countries have had plans to recycle waste paper to save money and labour. In countries where
there is cooperation of the public, paper mills recycle as much as sixty percent of waste paper.


Their simple work is to take away the ink, crush it up and make it into pulp again. For every
ton of recycled newsprint, twelve trees can be saved. We can insist that the more paper people
save, the more trees are preserved.


1. How many paper bags and newspapers are served and thrown everyday of the year?


...
2. What does making paper require?


...
3. What have many countries done to save money?


...
4. How many percent do paper mills recycle waste paper?


...
5. How many trees can be saved for every ton of recycled newsprint?


………


<b>III. Rewrite the following sentences.</b>
1. They wash the glass with detergent liquid.


The glass...
2. Ba repaired this bike yesterday.


This bike...
3. They melt the mixture until it becomes a liquid.


The mixture...


4. May I turn off the television?


Would you mind...
5. Nga irons clothes everymorning.


Clothes ...


<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Preparing date : 23 / 02 / 2010


<b>Period 71: </b>

<b> </b>

<b>test correction</b>



<b>I / Aims and Objectives : </b>By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:
-Get the correct answers of the test.


- Understand more about how to do a test.


<b>II</b> / <b>Correction</b>


<b>1 . Pre-correcting</b> .


a. Making a few remarks on the test.
b. Giving the paper back .


<b>2. While correcting</b> .
a. giving the answers.


<b>Exercise 1: </b>

10 x 0.5=5



1 2 3 4 5


close Is broken buy Was planted Will give


6 7 8 9 10
giving made sitting To hear moved


<b>Exercise 2 :</b>

5 x 0.5 =2,5


1 . Everyday of the year through out the world, about twenty million paper bags and
newspapers are served and thrown away.


2. Making paper requires a lot of wood pulp and the work of millions of workers.
3. Many countries have had plans to recycle waste paper to save money and labour.
4. paper mills recycle as much as sixty percent of waste paper.


5. For every ton of recycled newsprint, twelve trees can be saved.


<b>Exercise 3</b>

:

5 x 0.5 = 2,5
1 . The glass is washed with detergent liquid.
2. This bike was repaired yesterday by Ba.


3 . The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid.
4 . Would you mind if I turned off the Television .
5. Clothes are ironed every morning by Nga.


<b>3 . Post- correcting</b> .



- Focus on how to do a test .
- Get the test back


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>4 . Consolidation</b> :


- Preparing for unit 12 .


<b> </b> Preparing date : 25 / 02 / 2010


<b>Unit 12 A Vacation abroad</b>


<b> Period 72 Lesson 1 : Getting started </b>
<b> Listen and read </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b><i>: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of how to make </i>
<i>accept and decline invitations .</i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>Pictures , cassette , chart ( true / false ) </i>
C / <b>Procedure</b> :


I / <b>Warm up</b> :


1. <b>Guessing game</b> ( Getting started )


- Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to guess
what country it is .


- Feedback :



a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand
d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan


2. <b>Chatting</b> :


T :Where do you want to visit among these countries?
Ss:…………....


T : Why ?


Ss : ………


II / <b>Pre- reading</b> : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .


1. Pre – teach Vocabulary :
- to include : bao gom , gom co


- to come over : to come to Someone,<sub>s house to visit for a </sub>


short time


- to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to drive
him / her to a place


- abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country
-> to be / go / travel / live abroad


* <b>Checking Vocabulary</b> : <b>Rub out and remember</b>
III / <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b>



1. Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen ,<sub>s schedule </sub>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to
complete the grid with the information taken from the
dialogue .


- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the
information in the grid on the board .


Date Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thu 28
Schedule coming


to San
Francisco


Going


out Having dinner
with the
Smiths


Leaving
San
Francisco
- Have Ss copy


3. Comprehension Questions


- Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the questions .


- Let Ss compare their answers with their partner.


- Call on some Ss to answer
- Give feedback and correct
Answer key :


a) No , they won,<sub>t . Because they are coming on a tour , </sub>


and their accommodation is included in the ticket price ,


Individual


Teacher – Ss


Whole cla
Individual


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

so they will stay at the hotel .


b) No , he won,<sub>t . Because he will have a business meeting</sub>


in the evening that day .


c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel .
- Get Ss to copy .


IV / <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> :


 Grammar Awareness



- Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the
statements indicating the following situations
1. Making an invitation


2. Accepting an invitation
3. Declining an invitation
4. Making a complaint


- Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy .
1. Would you like to come and stay with us … ?
.. you must come over for dinner one night .


2. Ye , we ,<sub>d love to but we will only be in town for three </sub>


nights .


3. That is very kind of you but we are coming on a tour ..
4. Oh . dear . He is always working


V / <b>Homework </b>:


1. Learn by heart new words and structures to give some
more examples .


2. Do the exercises in the workbook
3. Prepare the next lesson .


Individual
Pair wor
Whole class



Pair work


Individual


Preparing date : 02 / 03 / 2010


<b>Unit 12 A Vacation abroad</b>


<b>Period 73 Lesson 2 : speak and listen </b>


<b>*Aim</b> :To get Ss to practice in making plans using tourist brochures and flight
information.


Listening for information about the weather.
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
- talk about their plans for a trip abroad.


- practice in listening to the weather forecast for information about the weather in
big cities in the world.


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: +itinerary(n) gallery(n) ,flight(n) ,via(n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

facilities(n) ,brochure(n)
- Grammar/ Structure: review



<b>*Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures,stereo


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm</b>
<b>- up</b>


<i><b>I.Quiz.</b></i>


-Tell ss who can answer the quetion will get 1 or 2 good
marks.


1,What's the end of everything? (letter g)


2,What word starts with T,ends with T and is full of T?
(Teapot)


3,What's in the middle of New York city?(York)
4,Which river in America has 4 eyes? (Misisipi)


T - Ss


<b>Presen</b>
<b>tation</b>


<i><b>II.Pre-teach vocabulary.</b></i>



-Elicit words from ss.
+itinerary(n) (explaination)
+gallery(n) (situation)
+flight(n) (from fly)
+via(n) (through a place)
+facilities(n) (trnslation)
+brochure(n) (realias)


<i>*Vocabulary checking: Slap the board.</i>


<i><b>III.Matching.</b></i>


-Show the table on the right of the board randomly and ask ss
to match them with the right titles on the left.


1.Itinery.


2.Flight information.
3.Hotel advertisement
4.Travel brochure


-Call on some ss to go to the board and draw the lines to
match the table with titles.


T - Ss


T


Ss



<b>Practi</b>


<b>ce</b> <i><b>IV.Tell me about.</b></i>


-Leave the table on the board ans ss look at them.


-Go through the tables,asking ss questions for information
about the flights,accommodation,and tourist places.


<i><b>*Suggestions:</b></i>


+How many flights a week can you take from Los Angeles to
Boston?


+Which flight can you take evryday of the week?
+Which of the hotels is cheaper?


+How much is a double room in Reserve Hotel?How about
the Atlantic Hotel?


+Where can you visit?


<i><b>V.Mapped dialogue.</b></i>


-Set the scene: These people are making a plan for their trip
from Los Angeles to Boston.Let's do it with them.


-Put the mappaed dialogue on the board.
-Elicit some exchange from ss.



T


T - Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

-Have some ss practice each exchange before going on to
another exchange.


-After finishing the dialogue,ask a good pair to demonstrate
the whole dialogue.


Where shall we stay?
Where should we visit?


What time should we leave
Los Angeles?


The Revere Hotel is
expensive but it has a gym
I think we should visit
Havard Medical Shool,the
Museum and Arts gallery.
There's a daily flight at 10
am,would that be OK?


S - S


<b>Post</b>
<b>-Speak</b>



<b>ing</b>


<i><b>Listening</b></i>


<i><b>Brainstorm :</b></i> hot wet
degree


Words related to


the weather forecast cool


cloudy humid dry


<i><b>Chatting :</b></i>


1. Have you ever listened to the weather forecast on TV or on
the radio ?


2. What does it often tell you about ?
( weather & temperature )


<i><b>Gap fill :</b></i>


-T put the gap fill table on the board
- T uses the cassette


- Ss listen to the tape twice
- Ss compare their answers
-Ss complete the box



Temperature


city weather low high


Sydney Dry,windy 20 26


Tokyo Dry,windy 15 22


London Humid ,


cold -3 7


Bangkok Warm ,dry 24 32


New york Windy,clou


dy 8 15


Paris Cool ,dry 10 16


- T corrects if necessary


T - Ss
T
Ss


T - Ss


T



Ss


T


<b>Consol</b>
<b>ida</b>
<b>tion</b>


- Ask Ss to talk about what new language they have just learnt
to review: making plans using tourist brochures and flight
information.


<b>Home</b>


<b>work</b> - Ask ss to make a plan for their coming summer <sub>holiday</sub>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

Preparing date : 05 / 03 / 2010


<b>Unit 12 A Vacation abroad</b>
<b>Period 74 Lesson 3: read </b>
<b>*Aim</b> :


Reading for information about the places of interest in the world.
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students can


- obtain some knowledge about some scenic sports in the USA



<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:


volcano , lave ,pour out , carre , be situated , overhead .
- Grammar/ Structure: : past progressive tense with when , while
<b>*Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm</b>
<b>- up</b>


<i><b>Hang man</b></i>
<i><b>U S A</b></i>
<i><b>Chatting</b></i>


- Have you ever been to USA?
- Do you know any palces in USA?


T - Ss


<b>Pre </b>
<b>-Readi</b>


<b>ng</b>



<i><b>New words:</b></i>


Volcano ( n ) ( drawing )
Lava ( n ) ( drawing )
Pour out ( v ) ( picture )


Carve ( v ) (mine / explanation )
Be situated ( translation )


Overhead ( adv ) above your head
Wharf (n)


Prison (n)


*Checking vocabulary: Rub out and remember


T - Ss


<b>While</b>
<b></b>
<b>-Readi</b>


<b>ng</b>


<i><b>Grid</b></i> ( 1/117)


- T draw the grid on the board


- T asks Ss to copy the gird in their notebooks (1/117)


Place What she did and saw


a. Hawaii
b New
York


- Went simming , visited
kilawea volcano


- wet shopping , bought lots
of souvenir


T


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

c. Chicago
d.Mount
Rushmore
e.Fancisco


-saw late Michigan
- saw the heads of 4
Presidents


- visited Fisherman’s wharf
the Na pa valley wine
growing avea and the
Alcatraz Prison


-T asks Ss to read the postcard from Mrs Quyen to her
children and fill in the gaps with the information taken


from them .


- T asks Ss to work in pairs


-T calls on some Ss to go to the board & write the
information in the grid on the board


- Ss give feedback
- T corrects if necessary


<b>Post </b>
<b>-Readi</b>


<b>ng</b>


<i><b>Comprehention question (2/118)</b></i>


- T asks Ss to look at the questions on page 118 & to
compare their answers with their partner


- Ss work in pairs


- T calls on some & give feedback
-T corrects if necessary


-T gives mark
Answer key :


a. She went there by plane



b. She saw the famous prison on the Island of Alcatraz .
c. It is the mount where the heads of four American
Presidents are carved into the rock , and it can be seen
from more than 100 km away


d. It is also called “ the windy city ”
e. She went shopping


T


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Consol</b>
<b>ida</b>
<b>tion</b>


- Ask Ss to talk about what new language they have just
learnt to review: some knowledge about some scenic
sports in the USA.


Ss


<b>Home</b>


<b>work</b> - Learn by heart new words .- Write the answers into your notebooks


- Do the exercises in the workbook (page3 / 71 ,4/72)
- Prepare writing



Ss






Preparing date : 09 / 03 / 2010


<b>Unit 12 A Vacation abroad</b>
<b>Period 75 Lesson 4: write </b>
<b> *Aim</b> : To get Ss to practice in writing a post card.


<b>* Objective</b>: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a postcard about
vacation .


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: complain , heaviness , hopitable , windy .
- Grammar/ Structure: :


simple past tense , present continuous tenses , adjectives


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>*Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interactio</b>



<b>n</b>
<b>Warm </b>


<b>-up</b>


<i><b>Network :</b></i>


Zoo
Places to visit things to buy


postcard
- T asks Sts some questions .


- Ss give feedback .
- T corrects if necessary


T - Ss


<b>Pre </b>
<b>-Writing</b>


<i><b>New words:</b></i>


- T presents new words
- Ss copy down


-complain (v)
- heaviness (n)
- hospitable (adj)


- windy (n)
- sunny (n)


- Checking technique “ rub out & remember ”
- T ask Ss:


What did Quyen send to her children ?
Postcard .


-T shows a postcard written by Quyen to Sally and asks Ss to
complete Quyen’s postcard.


-Ss read the postcard and fill in the missing words (work
arrangement : individual pair – compare )


-Ss feedback


- T asks Ss to read the complete postcard
- T corrects if necessary


<i><b>Complete (1/118) </b></i>


1. in 6. lovely / nice
2.people 7. bought


3 .weather 8. for


4.visited 9. heaviness
5.her 10. soon



T - Ss


T - Ss


<b>While </b>


<b>-Writing</b> <i><b>Exercise 2 (p/118)</b></i><sub>-</sub> <sub>T gives instructions </sub>


Necessary information


Place We’re having a


wonderful time
in the USA
+How do you


feel about the
people?


+Weather
+Who you


+The people are
friendly


+The weather
has been warm
and sunny


T



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

meet / visit
+What you
see


+What you
buy


+In San
Francisco, I
visited my
friend, Sandra
Smith


+No information
+I bought lots of
souvenir


- T gives an example for the first .
Example : Dear (Sally) , Jane


We ‘re having a wonderful time in Ha Noi , the capital of
VietNam .The people are hospitable and helpful and the
weather has been wonderful : cool and sunny .


In HaNoi . I visited some of my old friends , Tom and Sally
.


It was very nice to see them .



We visited the History Museum and some art galleries in
Hang Bai street and had lunch together at a vegetarian
restaurant .


I bought a lot of souvenirs and postcards for you and other
friends .


See you soon .
With love .
Mary


- T asks Ss to write your postcard .


- T calls Ss to read their posrcard in front of the class
- T corrects if necessary .


-Ss work in groups ( 4 groups)
Group 1 ( Da Lat )


2 ( Sa Pa )
3 ( Ha Noi )
4 ( Tay Ninh)


T


Ss


<b></b>


<b>Post-Writing</b> - Exhibition your postcards- T calls on some Ss to the front of the class and ask them to


read their postcards to the whole class .


-Ss give feedback .
-T corrects if necessary


<b>Consoli</b>
<b>da</b>
<b>tion</b>


- Ask Ss to talk about what new language they have just


learnt to review: write a postcard about vacation Ss


<b>Homew</b>


<b>ork</b> -Write your postcard in your notebook .-Do the exercises in the workbook page 75
-Prepare language focus


Ss




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

Preparing date : 12 / 03 / 2010


<b>Unit 12 A Vacation abroad</b>


<b>Period 76 Lesson 5: language focus </b>


<b>*Aim</b> :Practice in Past progressive and Present progressive tenses with “always”



<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about activities using
the present and past progressive tenses..


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: review


- Grammar/ Structure: : Simple past tense , present continuous tenses .
<b>*Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stag</b>


<b>e</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>War</b>
<b>m </b>


<b>-up</b>


<i><b>Memory game.</b></i>


- Divide the class in to 2 parts.


- Ask the first student in one group to say a simple sentence.


- Ask the first student in the other group repeat the previous


sentences and add one new sentence of his or her own.
- Go on until the last student can’t repeat the whole sentences


and his / her team loses the game.


Ss


<b>Pres</b>
<b>enta</b>
<b>tion</b>


<i><b>Language focus 1</b></i>.
Ordering pictures:


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 119 carefully.
- Tell Ss to listen and number the pictures .


- Read the verbs aloud.


1.walk with a dog 2.eat dinner


3.take a shower 4.talk to Grandma
5.read a comic 6.write a letter
- Call on some Ss to give their answers.


- Give feed back and correct.
Answer key:



a) 3 b) 2 c) 5 d) 6 e) 1 f) 4


<i><b>Teaching grammar.</b></i>


- Set the scene:


“Look at picture a )! What was Ba doing at 8 o’clock last night?”
- Elicit the answer from Ss, get Ss to repeat and write the


sentence on the board.


- Continue to picture f) with the same steps.


“What were Lan and her Grandma doing at that time?”


Ss


T


T


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<i><b>Model sentences:</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>Ba was taking a shower at 8 o’clock last night.
They were talking to each other at that time.


Be V- ing


<i>Concept check: Past progressive tense</i>
<i>Form: was/ were + V-ing</i>



<i>Use: to indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time </i>
in the past.


- Let Ss copy


T


<b>Prac</b>
<b>tice</b>


<b>Pres</b>
<b>enta</b>
<b>tion</b>


<i><b>Word - cue - drill</b></i>


- Show the cardboards and go through the verbs.
1. Ba/ take a shower


2. Hoa/ have dinner
3. Bao / read a comic
4. Nga / write a letter
5. Na / walk with her dog


6. Lan and her grandma / talk to each other
- Model the first sentence and have Ss repert.


- Ask the whole class work through the rest of the cues.
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the sentences.



<i><b>Language focus 2.</b></i>


<i>Matching</i>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 119 and do the
matching on page 120.


- Call on some Ss to give their answers.


<i>Answer key: a. C b. F c. E d . B e. D f. A</i>


<i><b>Teaching grammar.</b></i>


- Elicit the model sentences by asking the questions:
1.What was the Le family doing when the mailman came?
2.What happened while Nga was eating?


<i><b>Model Sentences:</b></i>


The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came.
Past continuous past simple


The phone rang while Nga was eating
Past simple Past continous
<i>Concept check: </i>


<i>Form: Main clause conjunction Adv clause</i>
Past continous when past simple
Past simple while past continous



<i>Use : Sequence of tences: An action was taking place in the past </i>
when another action took place.


- Get Ss to copy.


T


T - Ss
Ss


Ss


T - Ss


T


Ss


<b>Prac</b>


<b>tice</b> <i><b>Picture - drill</b></i><sub>-</sub> <sub>Put the photocopied pictures on the board in the order of the </sub>


word cues.


- Model the first sentence and have Ss repeat.


- The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came.
- Ask Ss to work through the rest of the cues



Picture a ) The le family / sleep
b) Hoa / eating


c) Nam / win the race
d) Mrs Thoa / cook
e) Lan / arrive at school


T - Ss


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

f) It / rain


<b>Pres</b>
<b>enta</b>
<b>tion</b>


<i><b>Language focus 3</b></i>
<i><b>Set the scene:</b></i>


- Elicit the model from Ss , using Vietnamese.


- Have Ss repeat and write the sentence on the board.


<i><b>Model sentence</b></i>s


Bao is always forgeting his homework.
Be adv V – ing


Present progressive


<i>Concept checking:</i>


<i>Form: is/ am / are + always + verb – ing</i>
<i>Use : to express a complain</i>


Have Ss copy


T
Ss


T


<b>Prac</b>


<b>tice</b> <i><b>Picture - Drill</b></i><sub>-</sub> <sub>Ask Ss to look at the pictures.</sub>


- Model the first picture and have Ss repeat.
- Ask Ss to work through the rest of the pictures.


- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the sentences.


Ss
T - Ss


<b>Con</b>
<b>solid</b>


<b>a</b>
<b>tion</b>



- Ask Ss to talk about what new language they have just learnt to
review: Past progressive and Present progressive tenses with
“always”


Ss


<b>Ho</b>
<b>mew</b>


<b>ork</b>


Write complete sentences in the notebook(1,2,3) Ss


Preparing date : 14 / 03 / 2010

<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>



<b>Period 77 Lesson 1: getting started </b>
<b> listen and read</b>
<b>*Aim</b> : Ss will be able to ask for explanations of events


<b>* Objective</b>: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for explanations of
events


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: fetch, yell, urge, rub, participate, award
- Grammar/ Structure: : compound words


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method



<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures,stereo


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Intera</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

<b>Warm </b>


<b>up</b> <i><b> Chatting</b></i>-T. writes the names on the board


Tom, David, Huckleberry, Oliver, Robinson


-Tell Ss these people are going to go on their visits to Vietnam
and they need advice on where to go


-Introduce the names, one by one


1/ Tom likes swimming and sunbathing
Where should he go? Why?


2/ David is interested in ancient cities?
3/ Huckleberry likes mountain – climbing


 ?


4/ Oliver is keen on pottery ?


5/ Robinson is fond of crowed places ?


T –


Ss


<b>Presenta</b>


<b>tion</b> <i><b> Pre-teach vocabulary:</b></i>+fetch (v) : to go to get (sth) and bring it
+yell (v) : to shout loudly


+urge (v) : make a person / an animal move more quickly
+rub (v)


+participate = to take part (in sth)


 participation (n)
+award (v)


He is the winner of the competition. They (award) him the
first prize)


<i><b>Check vocabulary</b></i>: What and where


-T. set the scene: “Ba invites his friend liz to a traditional
festival in the North of VietNam. Do you know what kind of
festival it is?


(It is the rice-cooking festival)


-T. asks Ss to guess what they are going to read by asking
questions


<i><b>Suggestions:</b></i>



+How many competitions do people enter in a rice-cooking
festival?


+In water-fetching festival competition, what do people do?


T –
Ss


T


Ss


T –
Ss


<b>While - </b>


<b>Reading</b> -Ss open their books, read the dialogue and listen to the tape<sub>-Ask Ss to read the statements and check (</sub><sub></sub><sub>) the boxes, </sub>


using the information in the dialogue


-Ss work in pairs and correct the false sentences


True or false
* Answer key:


a. F  Only one team member takes part in the
water-fetching contest



b. F  One person has to collect one water bottle


c. T


d. F  Pieces of bamboo are used to make the fire
e. F  In the final contest, the judges taste the rice
f. T


<i><b>Model sentences:</b></i>


There are three competitions: water-fetching, fire-making
and rice-cooking


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Post - </b>


<b>Reading</b> -Deliver posters to Ss-Ask Ss to do exercise on page 130 and write their answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

on the posters


-Ss work in pairs / groups


Language focus 3:
* Answer key:


a.A fire-making contest



b.A bull-fighting fighting festival
c.A car-making industry


d.A flower-arranging contest
e.A rice-exporting country
f.A clothes-washing machine


<b>Home</b>


<b>work</b> - Learn new words, do exercises again- Do exercise 3 in workbook
- Prepare: Lesson 2: Speak + Listen




Preparing date : 17 / 03 / 2010

<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>



<b>Period 78 Lesson 2: speak and listen</b>


<b>*Aim</b> : Ss will be able to talk about their preparation for a special event


<b>* Objective</b>: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their
presentations for a special event.


<b>*Language focus</b> - Vocabulary: Pomegranate, peach blossoms, Marigolds
Dried watermelon seeds, spring rolls
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method



<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interac</b>


<b>tion</b>
<b>Warm</b>


<b>up</b> -T. asks Ss to think of 5 things they often prepare for Tet<i><b>Find things in common</b></i>
-Ss write them on the board


-T. remarks and gives marks to Ss


decorate the room/ yard buy cakes


buy new dress
Paint the house


Send New Year cards to friends


T -
Ss


<b>2. </b>
<b>Pre-listenin</b>


<b>g</b>


<i><b>Speak 1</b></i>



Pre-teach vocabulary


+Pomegranate (n): +Peach blossoms (n)
+Marigolds (n) +Dried watermelon seed:
+Spring rolls (n)


-Ss join the game : -What and where


<i><b>Ordering</b></i>


-Ask Ss to read the dialogue on page 123 and put the
sentences in correct order


T – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

-Ss work in pairs


-Calls some pairs to give their answer
*Answer key:


A  F B ->G C -> H D  J E  I


Ss


T – Ss


<b>3.While</b>
<b></b>



<b>-speakin</b>
<b>g</b>


<i><b>Mapped dialogue</b></i>


-T. puts the chart with the cues on the board
-Elicit the exchanges from Ss


-Ss work in pairs


-T. calls some pairs to practice each exchange before going
on to another exchange


Mrs Quyen Lan


A: You/ tidied/
bedroom?


B: Market/ have
to/ oranges/
pomegranates
C: Sure/ will
D: not really/ that/
want house/ look
nice/ festival


E: That/ very good.
Bye


1. Yes/ where/ going/


2. Could/ collect/ new Ao
Dai tailor/ corner/?


3. Thanks/ anything/ want/
me/ do/ while/ out/?


4. Mom/ I/ what/ do now/
will/ clean/ glass windows
5. Bye/


<i><b> Speak 2</b></i>


-Ask Ss choose one of the festival (page 123) and make up
their own dialogues


-Ss work in pairs


-Then T. calls on some pairs to demonstrate their dialogues
before the class


a village festival a school festival
a spring festival a harvest festival
a flower festival


T
Ss


S – S


Ss


S –
S


<b>Post </b>
<b>-Speakin</b>


<b>g</b>


<i><b> Listening</b></i>


<i><b>Gap-fill prediction </b></i>


-T. sets the scene


“The Robinson family is making preparations for Tet. They
want to buy things to make it a traditional festival as


Vietnamese people do”


-Ask Ss to open their books and read the statements on page
124


-Ss predict the words in the gaps play the tape (2 or 3 times)
-Then correct


* Answer keys:


a. Mr Robinson/ Flower market
b. Traditional



c. Dried watermelon seeds
d. Make spring rolls


T


Ss


T – Ss


<b>Homew</b>
<b>ork </b>


<b>`</b>


-Learn new words


-Do exercises in workbook
-Prepare: Read


Ss


Preparing date : 19 / 03 / 2010

<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<b>Period 79 Lesson 3: read</b>
<b>*Aim</b> : Ss will be get some knowledge about Christmas


<b>* Objective</b>: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get some knowledge
about Christmas



<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: spread, Christmas carol, patron saint, jolly
- Grammar/ Structure: review


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures,stereo


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interacti</b>


<b>on</b>
<b>War</b>


<b>m up</b> -T. teaches Ss an English Christmas song-Ask Ss to listen to the tape and sing a song


Ex: Silent night, I wish you a merry Christmas T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>Pre-reading</b> + spread (v) (to cover a larger and larger area).<i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary</b></i>


 to spread  spread  spread
+ Christmas carol (n)


(Silent night is a Christmas carol)
+ patron saint (n)



+ jolly (adj) happy and cheerful


<i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>


a. d.


b. e.


c. f.


*Answer key:


a. Santa Claus d. spread
b. jolly e. decorat
c. carol f. patron said


T – Ss


Ss


T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>While-reading</b> -Ask Ss to open their books and read the paragraphs on <i><b>Grid</b></i>
page 124/ 125


-Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it


-Ask Ss to read the paragraph again and complete the grid


-Give feedback and correct


*Answer key
Christmas


specials Place of origin Date
The Christmas


tree Riga Early 1500s


The Christmas


Cards England Mid -19th


century
The Christmas


Carol No informati


on


800
years
ago


T – Ss


Tansa aucls pdsear


codraete



locra <sub>ontrpatsia</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

Santa Claus USA 1823


<b></b>


<b>Post-reading</b> -Ask Ss to answer the questions-Ss work in pairs
-T. corrects and gives answers
*Answer key:


a. More then two centuries ago


b. Because wanted to send Christmas greetings to his
friends


c. 800 years ago


d. An American professor named Clement Clarke Moore
e. On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor
Moore’s poem


T


Ss


<b>Consoli</b>
<b>da</b>
<b> tion</b>



- Ask Ss to talk somethings about Christmas


<b>Homew</b>


<b>ork</b> -Rewrite the answers in their notebooks-Learn the worlds


-Write it up: Use the information in the grid to write the
brief paragraphs


-Prepare: Lesson 4: Write


Ss




Date:12/3/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss practice in writing a report on a festival they have joined
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a report on a festival
they have joined.


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:



- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>129</b>


<b>Unit 13 </b>

<b>FESTIVALS</b>


<b>Lesson 4 : Write (P. 126,127)</b>
<b>Period 81</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Memory game</b></i>


-T. shows the photocopied picture to Ss and ask them to
observe it carefully


-Let Ss look at the picture for about 20’’ then put it away
-T. asks Ss to listen to the questions


1/ How many people are there in the picture?
What are they doing?


2/ Name all the things in the picture
-Ss answer



-T. puts the picture on the board again
-Give feedback and correct


*Answer key:


1/ They are participating in the rice-cooking competition
2/ Rice, basket, pans, bamboo sticks, paper fans,


chopsticks, a flag


T – Ss


T


T - Ss


<b>Pre-writing </b> <i><b>Lucky numbers</b></i>


-Write 9 numbers on the board from 1 to 9


-Tells Ss each number is for a question but 3 of them are
lucky numbers


-If Ss choose a lucky number, they don’t have to answer
any questions


-Divide the class into 2 teams


1/ What do you call the festival where people have to cook
rice?



(The rice cooking festival)


2/ How many competitions are there in the rice-cooking
festival? What are they?


( 3/ water-fetching, fire-making and rice-cooking)
3/ Lucky number


4/ What do people use to fetch water? (bottles)
5/ Lucky number


6/ Do they use pieces of wood to make fire?
(No, pieces of bamboo)


7/ What do people have to do before they cook the rice?
(separate the rice from the husk)


8/ Lucky number


9/ How many people are there altogether in a team taking
part in the rice-cooking festival?


(9, one for water-fetching, two for fire-making and six for
rice-cooking)


T


Ss



T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>While-writing</b> -T. asks Ss to use the information in the dialogue on page <i><b>Gap-fill</b></i>
121 to fill in the gaps in the report on page 127


-Ss work in pairs


-T. corrects and remarks
*Answer key:


1/ rice-cooking 6/ traditional
2/ one/ a 7/ bamboo
3. water-fetching 8/ six
4/ run 9/ separate
5/ water 10/ added


T


Ss


<b></b>
<b>Post-writing</b>


<i><b>Questions and answers</b></i>


- Ask Ss to write a similar report on a festival they’ve
joined recently



-Ss look at the questions and practice speaking first by
answering the questions from a  g


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Homework</b>


-T. has Ss connect the sentences to make it a report
-Monitor and help Ss with their work


-Call on some Ss to read their reports aloud
-Write your report in your notebooks


-Do exercises in workbook and prepare: Language Focus
1,2,3


Date:17/3/
2008




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss will be able to use reported speech and the passive in the past, present and
future tense


<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use reported speech and the
passive in the past , present and future tenses


<b>*Language focus</b>:



- Vocabulary: jumble, scatter, jar, pull


- Grammar/ Structure: Passive form, reported speech
<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b>
<b>(3 minutes)</b>


<i><b>Pelmanism</b></i>


-T. prepares 11 cardboards, numbered from 1 to 11 on one
side and the words on the other side


-Divide the class into 2 teams and ask each team to choose
2 numbers, one in the first row, if the words in both cards
match in sequence of an infinitive with its past participle,
this team will get a point


Infinitive Past


T
Ss



<b>131</b>


<b>Unit 13 </b>

<b>FESTIVALS</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : Language Focus (P. 128,129)</b>
<b>Period 82</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

participle
Put


Write
Hold
Make
Break


Put
Written
Held
Made
Broken


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b>


<b> (10 minutes)</b> <i><b>Language focus 1</b><b>Gap-fill </b></i>


-Ask Ss to look at language focus 1 on page 128


-Have Ss fill in the gaps with the right form of the verbs in


the box


-Ss work in pairs


-Call on some Ss to write their answers (only the verb
forms)


-T. corrects
*Answer key:


a. were performed
b. was decorated/ put
c. is made


d. will be held
e. was awarded
f. was written


T
Ss


T


T – Ss


<b>Presentation</b> <i><b> Language focus 2</b></i>


1/ Pre-teach vocabulary (5 minutes)
-T. presents new words



-Ss repeat and say the meaning
+ jumble (v)


+ scatter (v) (to throw things everywhere on the ground)
+ jar (n) (drawing/ realia)


+ pull (v)


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b>


<b>(5 minutes)</b> <i><b> Gap-fill</b></i>


-Ask Ss to look at language focus 2 on page 128 and 129
and fill in the gaps with the right form of the verbs in the
box


-Correcting
*Answer key:


1. jumbled 4. scattered
2. broken 5. pull
3. broken


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Presentation</b> <i><b>Language focus 4 (10 minutes)</b></i>



1/ Pre-teach
-T. sets the scene


-Then write the quoted speech on the board
He said, “I’m a plumber”


(quoted/ direct speech)


 Model sentence: reported speech
He said he was a plumber


 Tenses
Direct


speech Reported speech
Present  Past simple


T – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

simple
Will
Must


 Would


 Had to


 Pronouns (depending on the subject of the main clause)



 Adverbs of place and time
This  that


Now  then
Here  there
Today  that day


Tomorrow  the next day
Yesterday  the day before
Ago  before


<b>Practice</b> <i><b>Transformation drill</b></i>


-Ask Ss to look language focus 4 on page 130 and do the
exercise


*Answer key:


b. He said he could fix the faucets
c. He said the pipes were broken


d. He said new pipes were very expensive


e. He said Mrs. Thu had to pay him then -Ask Ss to look
language focus 4 on page 130 and do the exercise


Ss


T - Ss



<b>Post</b>


<b>(5 minutes)</b> -Ss rewrite the sentences, remember to keep the meaning unchanged a. The children said, “We are waiting for the
school bus”  The children said …


b. Nobody has used this machine for years  This machine




c. The last time I played tennis was in 1990  I haven’t …


Ss


<b>Homework</b>


<b>(2 minutes)</b> -Learnt by heart the words, grammar-Do exercise and prepare: Unit 14: Lesson 1: Getting
started + Listen and read


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

Date:24/3/ 2009




<b> </b>


<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss will seek information about a language game to complete a summary
<b>* Objective</b>:



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to seek information about a
language game to complete a summary.


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary: none


- Grammar/ Structure: I don’t know how to play it
<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Quiz</b></i>


-Prepare some postcards or pictures of the famous world
landmarks or scene spots in Vietnam


-Show the pictures, one by one, to Ss and ask them what place it
is


-Divide the class into 2 teams, the team able to answer the
question will get 1 point.


-Give Ss some suggestions to help them easily recognize the
place



Eg: Mount Bach Ma


 Suggestions:


It is a place in the Central Vietnam with cold weather everyday
of the year …


Getting started
*Answer key:
a/ The Pyramid


b/ Sydney Opera House
c/ Stone and Read


T – Ss


T


<b></b>
<b>Pre-reading</b>


<i><b>Ordering</b></i>


-Set the scene:


“Nga, Nhi and Hoa are playing a language game called
guessing game. How does this game work? Rearrange the
statements in the right order of the game”.


-Put the statements chart on the board



-Ask Ss to read the statements and put them in the right
order.


 How to play the guessing game


-B asks questions to find out who or what is
-A thinks of a famous person or place


-B wins if he/ she can guess the correct answer
-A give B a clue


T


T - Ss
<b>Unit 14 : </b>

<b>wonders of the</b>



<b>world</b>



<b>Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and </b>
<b>Read (P. 131,132) </b>


<b>Period 83</b>
<b>Period 82</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

-B loses if he/ she can’t guess the correct answer
-A can only answer “yes” or “no”


<b>While </b>
<b>-Reading</b>



-Call on some pairs to go to the board and write their
answers


-Ask Ss to open their books and read the dialogue on page
131, 132 while listening to the tape/ play the tape


-Check if Ss’ guesses are right or not


-Have Ss copy the statements in the right order
*Answer key:


2. a think of 4,1,6,3,5.


Gap fill


-Have Ss read the dialogue again and complete the summary
(2) on page 132


-Ask Ss to compare their answers with their partners
*Answer key:


1. Game, 2. Place, 3. Clue, 4. Vietnam 5. America, 6.
Golden


7. Right, 8. Was


Grammar Awareness


-Elicit the target language by asking Ss a question (in


Vietnam)


* Model sentences:


I don’t know how to play it


Form: S + V + question word + to –inf
Use: Reduced form of an indirect question.
Eg: I don’t know how I can play it


how to play it


Ss


T – Ss


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Post</b> Matching


-Asking Ss to read the summary again
-Write the worlds on the board


-Ask Ss to match the words in Column A with their
explanations in Column B


-Ask some Ss to give their answers



A B


1.Suggest
(v)


2. Golden
(adj)
3. Clue
(n)
4. bored


a. a piece of information
that helps you discover
the answer to question
b. What you often feel
when you have nothing
to do


c. made of gold
d. make a suggestion
*Answer key:


1. d 2. c 3. a 4. b


Ss


T – Ss


<b>Home</b>



<b>work</b> Homework-Learn model sentences by heart
-Reread the dial


-Do exercises in the workbook
-Prepare: Unit 14: Speak


Ss


V


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

Date:25/3/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss will be able to make a report on famous places using reported speech
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make a report on famous
places using reported speech.


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary: none


- Grammar/ Structure: Indirect questions with if and whether
<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures



<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Who is the faster?</b></i>


-T. inform the topic and time limit


-Then T. has Ss write 10/15 famous world places within 3
minutes


-Deliver poster to Ss


-Tell Ss to put their posters on the board
-Give feedback and correct


Ss


<b>Presen</b>
<b>tation</b>


<i><b>Matching</b></i>


-T. puts the chart with the statements on the board


-Ask Ss to read the statements and the names of the famous
places in the box on page 133 and do matching


1/ It was designed and built by the French civil engineer with
300 metres in height



2/ It is in South Central Asia, 8.848 metres high above sea level
3/ It was built from 246-209 BC and some people say it can be
seen from the moon


4/ It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of the Houses
of Parliament in London


5/ It is a skyscraper in Manhattan, New York City


6/ It is a famous place in Quang Binh Province recognize as a
World Heritage by Unessco


T


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b> -Check if Ss understand the statements
-T. calls on some pairs to give their answers
-T. give feedback and correct


*Answer key:
1/ Eiffel Tower
2/ Mount Everest
3/ Great Wall of China
4/ Big Ben


5/ Empire State building USA


Ss


T
<b>Unit 14 : </b>

<b>wonders of the</b>



<b>world</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : Speak +Listen (P. 132,133)</b>
<b>Period 84</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

6/ Phong Nha Cave


Questions and answer drill


-Ask Ss to write yes/no questions about 10 places in the box,
using the information in the matching


Suggest:


1/ Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in Paris?


2/ Is the Empire State building located in New York City?
3/ Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in Malaysia?
4/ Is the Great Barrier Reef in Australia?


5/ Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore?
6/ Is Mount Everest in Nepal?...


-Monitor and assist Ss if necessary


-Have Ss ask and answer the questions, check yes or no
-Call on a group to demonstrate their work



<i><b>Grammar drill</b></i>


-T. set the scene


Ask a student: (Lan/ …)


T: Is Hue Citadel in the Central Vietnam
S: Yes, it is


-T. asks Ss to listen


T: I asked Lan if Hue Citadel was in the Central Vietnam. She
said (that) it was


-T. writes the statement on the board


Model sentences:


I said to Lan, “Is Hue Citadel in the
Central Vietnam?”
(Yes/ No questiondirect
speech)


I asked if Hue Citaldel was in


Lan the Central Vietnam?”
Form: S + V + O + if/where + S + V …


T – Ss



T


T – Ss


<b>Production</b> -T. choose a group’s answers to demonstrate the model (asking
and reporting)


-Call on a pair in a group to demonstrate the exchanges and the
tell one of them to report.


-Have Ss work in their groups


-Call on Ss in different groups to report in front of the class
-Give feedback and correct


T
Ss


<b>Homework</b> -Write 10 indirect questions of your group in your notebooks


-Prepare: Unit 14: Listen Ss


Date:26/3/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> : Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the world
<b>* Objective</b>:



<b>137</b>


<b>Unit 14 : </b>

<b>wonders of the</b>


<b>world</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : Read (P. 134)</b>
<b>Period 85</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get some knowledge about
the wonders of the world.


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: (v) compile, claim, hono(n) God, religion,(a) royal
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Hangman</b></i>


-Draw dashes on the board, each dash is for a letter of the world
-Have Ss guess the letters, one by one


-For every wrong guess, draw a line (from 1 to 8), Ss will lose the


game if they guess wrong 8 times


(C ) (O) (R) (A) (L)


1
2


5 6


4
7



8


Revision: Coral, crystal-clear, snorkel, relaxing


T – Ss


<b></b>
<b>Pre-reading</b>


Pre-teach vocabulary
New words:


+ compile (v)
+ claim (v)
+ honor (v)
+ god (n)
+ religion (n)


+ royal (a)


 Slap the board


<i><b> True/ False prediction</b></i>


-Ask Ss to decide if the statements are true or false
-Write Ss’ guesses on the board


1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of what he thought were the
seven wonders of the world


2. The only surviving wonder is The Pyramid of Cheeps in Egypt
3. Today, we can still see the Hanging Gardens of Babylon in
present – day Iraq


4. Angkor Wat was originally built to honor a Hindu God


T - Ss


S – S


T – Ss


Ss


Compile Claim


Royal
God



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

5. The Great wall of China a first wasn’t in the list of the 7
wonders of the world


6. In the early 15th century, the Khoner King chose Angkor War
as the new capital


<b></b>


<b>While-reading</b> -Ask Ss to decide if the statements are true or false-Write Ss’ guesses on the board


-Ask Ss to read the text on page 134, to check their guesses
-Call on some Ss to correct the false statements


*Answer key:


1. F  A Greek man named Antipater did it
2. T


3. F  The only surviving wonder is the pyramid of Cheeps in
Egypt


4. T
5. T


6. F  In the early 15th century, the Kh’mer King chose Phnom
Penh as the new capital


<i><b>Multiple choice</b></i>



-Ask Ss to choose the best answers to complete the sentences
-Put the answers chart on the board


-Read the statements aloud and make hand gestures to show the
missing words


-Ask Ss to choose A, B, C or D


-Correct and have Ss write the right answers in their notebooks
<i><b>Answer key</b></i>:


a/ The only surviving wonder on Antipater’s list is the Pyramid of
Cheops


b/ Angkor wat was originally built for Hindus


c/ Angkor wat was part of a royal Khmer city a long time ago
d/ In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose Phnom Penh as the new
capital


T
Ss


T – Ss


Ss


T - Ss


<b></b>



<b>Post-reading</b> -Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it<i><b>Grid</b></i>


-Ask Ss to read the text again and fill in the grid with the
information taken from the text


Wonders of the world Country
1. Hanging gardens of


Babylon


2.
3.
4.
5.
6.


Iraq


.


.
.


.
.


T


Ss



<b>Home</b>


<b>work</b> -Call on some Ss to give their answers-Do the exercises in the workbook
-Prepare: Lesson 5: Write


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Date:26/3/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss can write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a letter to a friend
about a place they have visisted.


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary:(n) canyon, ranger, edge,(a) Breathtaking, temperate
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:



<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Guessing game</b></i>: Wonders of the world


-Ask Ss to think of one of the wonders of the world and write it
on a piece of paper


-Call on a student to the front of the class with his/ her paper
-Have the rest of the class ask him/ her yes-no questions to guess
the wonder


-The student having the right guess will take the place of the last
student


T – Ss


<b></b>


<b>Pre-writing</b> +Canyon(n)<i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary</b></i>
+Ranger(n)


+Edge(n)


+Breathtaking(a)
+Temperate(a)


<i><b>Rub out and remember</b></i>


<i><b>Insertion</b></i>



-Ask Ss to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the
grand can you on page 135


-Tell Ss to complete the letter by inserting the letters of the
missing sentences (A, B, C and D)


T – Ss


Ss
<b>Unit 14 : </b>

<b>wonders of the</b>



<b>world</b>


<b>Lesson 4 : Write (P. 135)</b>
<b>Period 86</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

-Call on some Ss to read their completed letters in front of the
class


-Give feedback and correct
Answer key:


1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A


<b></b>


<b>While-writing</b> <i><b>Set the scene</b></i>:


“Image you have visited a place recently. Write a letter to a friend
of yours and tell him/ her about this place



-Draw the outline on the board and elicit some details
+ place (Phong Nha cave/ Cuc Phuong National park …)
+ Distance (100km/ 12 hours by train/ …)


+ How to get there (by bus/ plane/ …)
+ Sights (beautiful/ breathtaking/ …)
+ Weather (temperate/ sunny/ cool/ …)
+ How you feel (happy/ relaxed/ …)


-Have Ss talk about something they have done first by asking
questions for them to answer


-Ask Ss to write the letter in their notebooks
-Monitor and assist Ss if necessary


-Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class
-Give feedback and correct


T


Ss


T


<b></b>


<b>Post-writing</b> -Ask Ss to use the outline on the board and the information in Interview
their letters to make an interview



-Model: call on a student to stand up to answer the questions
Where have you just visited?


How far is it?


How did you get there?


What is it like?/ Is it beautiful?
How about the weather/


How did you fell?


-Ask Ss play in turn the role of an interview and an interviewee
-Monitor and correct


-Call on some pairs to demonstrate their interview


Ss


<b>Home</b>


<b>work</b> -Write the complete letter (1) in your notebooks-Do exercises in workbook
-Prepare: Lesson 5: Language focus


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

Date:28/3/
2009





<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss can report what people ask and answer about one of the world cultural
Heritage of Vietnam


<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about one of the
world cultural Heritage of Vietnam


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:


- Grammar/ Structure: Passive forms
Indirect questions with if and where
Question words before to infinitives


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Bingo</b></i>


Temperate, breathtaking, royal, religious, canyon, edge,
pyramid, compile



T – Ss


<b>Presen</b>
<b>tation</b>


<i><b>Language focus 1:</b></i>


<i><b>Revision</b></i>


-T. asks Ss to resay the form of the passive in the Past Simple
tense


-Ss resay the form of the passive in the Past Simple tense


-T. has Ss look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in the
box for the gaps in sentences


was/ were + PP


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b> -Ask Ss to complete the sentences with the right passive form of
the verbs


-Call on some Ss to give their answers
-Give feedback and correct



Answer key:
a/ was completed
b/ was constructed
c/ was designed
d/ was presented
e/ was reached


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Production</b> <i><b>Matching</b></i>


-Write the words and their meaning on the board


-Ask Ss to read the exercises again and do the matching


1. construct (v)


2. design (v) a. thiet keb. cuoc tham hiem


T
Ss
<b>Unit 14 : </b>

<b>wonders of the</b>



<b>world</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : Language focus (P. 135)</b>
<b>Period 87</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

3. summit (n)
4. expedition
5. guide


c. xay dung
d. huong dan vien
e. hoi nghi


Answer key:


1. C 2. A 3. E 4. B 5. D


<b>Presen</b>


<b>tation</b> <i><b>Language focus 2</b></i>-Set the scene :


“Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about My Son, one of the world
cultural Heritage of Vietnam. Beside answering some of Nhi’s
questions, Nga gave her some additional information about My
Son”


-Ask Ss to report what Nhi asked Nga, using reported speech
-Call on some Ss to resay the use of the Indirect yes/ no
questions on the board


-Model the first question and ask Ss to listen
a/ Do you know My Son, Nga?


 Nhi asked Nga if/ whether she knew My Son



T - Ss


<b>Practice</b> <i><b>Substitution drill</b></i>


<i><b>Oral drill</b></i>


-Call on one student to read the question, another student read
the reported sentence


-Give feedback and correct if necessary


-Go on asking Ss to do the rest questions orally with the same
steps


Writing drill


T - Ss


<b>Prodution</b> <i><b>Writing drill </b></i>


-Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the reported
sentences


-Correct and ask Ss to write the right answers in their notebooks
*Answer key:


b/ Nhi asked Nga if/ whether My Son was in Quang Nm
province


c/ Nhi asked Nga if it was far from HaNoi



d/ Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at My Son


e/ Nhi asked Nga if many tourist visited My Son every year
f/ Nhi asked Nga if Nga wanted to visit My Son one day


Ss


<b>Production</b> <i><b>Language focus 3:</b></i>


<i><b>Word cue drill</b></i>


<i><b>Oral drill</b></i>


a/ tell/ how/ go there


Nga told Nhi how to go there


 S + V+ question word + to-inf
<i><b>Writing drill</b></i>


*Answer key:


a/ Nga told Nhi how to go there


b/ Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets
c/ Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs


d/ Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An
e/ Nga told what to do there during the visit



<i><b>Language focus 4</b></i>:
<i><b>Presentation</b></i>


T – Ss


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

Pre-teach


1. I want to go out at
to inf weekend
2. She enjoys swimming very
V-ing much
3. He can speak many


modal bare language
verbs inf


*<i><b>Concept check</b></i>


1. Forms: S + V + To-inf


Use: Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to-inf
2. Form: S + V + V-ing


Use: Same use as enjoy: start, begin, advice …
3. Form: S + Modal verbs + bare inf


Use: Modals: can, could, will, would, shall, should, may,


might, must


T - Ss


<b>Home</b>


<b>work. </b> -Turn the passive sentences in language focus 1 into the active voice
-Do exercise in workbook


-Prepare: Review knowledge


Ss


Date:1/4/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


- To help Ss practice in use passive form, Past progressive with when and
while, Reported speech


<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :


- consolidate some new points of grammar they have learnt.


<b>*Language focus</b>:



- Vocabulary: Review
- Grammar/ Structure:
- Past progressive


- Past progressive with when and while
- Passive form : be + past participate


<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b> Period 88</b>

<b> :Consolidation</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

- Reported speech.


<b>*Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm - up</b> <i><b>I.Matching</b></i>


<i><b>Match the names of each famous place in column A with the right </b></i>
<i><b>country in column B</b></i>


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


<b>1. Phong Nha cave</b> <b>A. China</b>



<b>2. Eiffel Tower</b> <b>B. America</b>


<b>3. Great Wall</b> <b>C. Australia</b>


<b>4. Sydney Opera house</b> <b>D.Viet Nam</b>


<b>5. The Statue of Liberty</b> <b>E. France</b>


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b> II.Exercise 1.Match a line in A with a line in B, using when
or while.


<i><b>A</b></i> <i><b>B</b></i>


<b>1. I was riding to school</b>


When
While


<b>a.she was getting </b>
<b>dressed</b>


<b>2. Her legs got burnt</b> <b>b.I dropped a plate</b>


<b>3. The zip broke</b> <b>c.I made a mistake</b>


<b>4. I was drying the dishes</b> <b>d.she was boiling some </b>


<b>water</b>


<b>5. I was adding up the </b>


<b>figures</b>


<b>e.I was cleaning my </b>
<b>teeth</b>


<b>6. The filling came out</b> <b>f.I fell off my bike</b>


<b>7. He was driving to work</b> <b>g.she was sunbathing</b>


<b>8. The kettle exploded</b> <b>h.the windscreen </b>


<b>scattered</b>


<i>Answer key: </i>


1.I was riding to school when I fell off my bike.


2.Her legs got burnt when she was sunbathing.


3.The zip broke while whe was getting dressed.


4.I was drying the dishes when I dropped a plate.


5.I was adding up the figures when I made a mistake.


6.The filling came out while I was cleaning my teeth.


7.He was driving to work when the windscreen scattered.



8.The kettle exploded while she was boiling some water.


<i><b>III.Exercise 2:Rewrite the sentensec, putting the verbsin </b></i>
<i><b>the passive. </b></i>


<i><b>1. My car / damage / last night.</b></i>
<i><b>My car was damaged last night.</b></i>


<i><b>2. The machines / make / in Scotland.</b></i>


<i><b>3. The money / change into dollars / at the bank.</b></i>
<i><b>4. Cheese / make / from / milk.</b></i>


<i><b>5. The children / give / some food.</b></i>
<i><b>6. The house / paint / every year.</b></i>


<i><b>7. Several people / hurt / in an accident last night.</b></i>


*Answer key:


2. The machines were made in Scotland.


3. The money was changed into dollars at the bank.
4. Cheese is made from milk.


5. The children were given some food.
6. The house is painted every year.


T - Ss



Ss


T - Ss


T


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

7. Several people were hurt in an accident last night.


<i><b>IV.Exercise 3.Put the statements into reported speech,as </b></i>
<i><b>in the example.</b></i>


<i><b>"I'm tired" she said.</b></i>


<i><b>She said (that) she was tired.</b></i>


<i><b>1."I can't swim very well" I told her.</b></i>


<i><b>2."I don't want to go swimming" Andrew said</b></i>
<i><b>3. "We're leaving on Friday"we said</b></i>


<i><b>4. "We will have lunch in Luigi's restaurant" they said.</b></i>
<i><b>5."I am leaving in london now" Janet said</b></i>


-Ss work in pairs.
-Ss give feedback.
-Correct together.
*Answer key:



1. I told her that I couldn't swim very well.


2. Andrew said that he didn't want to go swimming.
3. We said we were leaving on Friday.


4. They said they would have lunch in Luigi's restaurant.
5. Janet said she was living in London then.


T


Ss


<b>Consolida</b>
<b>tion&</b>
<b>Homework</b>


-Sum up the content of the lesson.
-Ss prepare for the test


Ss


Date: 29/03/2008


Period 89 : TEST : 45 MINUTES
A. Aim:


This period helps Ss to have a chance to review the knowledge having been learned
from Unit 13 to Unit 14 and Ss can recognize their errors and then they’ll correct them
B. Content



I. There are four mistakes in this advertisement. Listen to the tape. Correct the mistakes
(2ms)


DO YOU WANT A QUIET, RELAXING
VACATION?


Look no further than beautiful southern Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the
Coconut Palm Inn. Take guided tours through the jungle, swim in the crystal-clear
water of the Coral Sea and snorkel amongst the coral of the Great Barrier Reef Marine
Park – a World Heritage Site


Call (077) 6824 3927 for more information
II. Choose the correct words or phrases to fill in the blanks (2ms)
1/ I take part most youth activities of my school.


a. of b. on


c. to


d. in


2/ Jane saw her old friend while she the street.


a. crossed b. is crossing c. was crossing d.


crosses


3/ I don’t know how the game



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

4/ The Hanging Gardens of Babylon is one of the of the world


a. buildings b. walls c. wonders


d. strangers


III. Complete the sentences, using the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets
(2ms)


1/ What you (do) at 8 o’clock last night?
I (watch) television


2/ When we (meet) George and Linda yesterday, we (walk)
through the park


IV. Change these sentences into passive voice (2ms)
1/ John gave me these records last week




2/ People speak English all over the world




3/ Bell invented the telephone in 1876




4/ Ba invited Liz to the rice – cooking festival





V. Read the passage carefully (2ms)


Vietnam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar calendar. It’s officially
known as Tet Nguyen Dan, or Tet. It begins between January twenty-first and February
nineteen. The exact date changes from year to year. Vietnamese people usually make
preparations for the holiday several weeks beforehand. They tidy their houses, cook
special food, clean and make offerings on the family altars. On the New Year’s Eve,
people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, then they put on new clothes and give
one another the greetings of the season. Tet lasts ten days. The first three days are the
most important. Vietnamese people believe that how people act during those days will
influence the whole year. As result, they make every effort to avoid arguments and
smile as much as possible.


1/ What is Vietnam’s New Year know as?
2/ When does the Lunar New Year begin?


3/ What do Vietnamese people usually do to prepare for Tet?
4/ What do people do on the New Year’s Eve


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

Date : 1/ 4 / 09
Period 89 . English Written Test


I.<b>Ma trËn.</b>


<b>Chủ đề</b> <b>Nhận biết</b> <b>Thông hiểu</b> <b>Vận dụng</b> <b>Total </b>


KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL
I. Pronunciation 5



2


5


2
II. Language


focus


10
2,5


10


2,5
III. Reading




5


2,5


5


2,5


IV. Writing 5



3
5


3


<b>Total</b> 15


4,5
5


2,5
5


3
25


10


<b>Full name:...</b> <b>khánh thành JUNIOR HIGH </b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>Class: 8...</b> <b> ENGLISH TEST</b>
<b> SCHOOL YEAR : 2008-2009</b>


<b>Marks: ... </b>

<b>ENGLISH 8</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Time allowed: 45 minutes </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.(2pts)</b>


1.A. h<b>u</b>sk B. s<b>u</b>gar C. <b>u</b>pset
2. A. g<b>o</b>d B.buffal<b>o</b> C. <b>o</b>verhead


3. A. r<b>e</b>duce B. f<b>e</b>stival C. r<b>e</b>ligious
4. A. w<b>o</b>nder B. t<b>o</b>wer C. c<b>o</b>uncil
5. A. compet<b>i</b>tion B. <b>i</b>nclude C. fest<b>i</b>val


<b>II.</b>


<b> </b><i><b>Language focus.</b></i>


<i><b>Circle the best option A,B,C or D to complete each of the following sentences (2.5pts)</b></i>


1. My mother ………….Television at 8o’clock last night.


A.was watching B. were watching C. is watching D. watching
2.Colour Television …………by John Logie Baid in 1928.


A. invented B.were invented C.was invented D.is invented
3. He said he ………….an English teacher.


A. be B. is C.was D.were
4. I was listening to music when my mother ……..home.


A. has arrived B. was arriving C. arrived D. arrives
5. I take part ... most youth activities of my school.


A. of B.on C.in D. at
6.The Hanging Gardens of Babylon is one of the ...of the world
A. buildings B. walls C. wonders D.rivers
7. I don’t know how ...the game


A. playing B. to play C. played D. can I play


8.My mother is always ...about the things I bought.


A. complaining B. complains C. complained D. to complain
9. We've decided ... for HCM city tomorrow.


A. leave B. to leave C. leaving D. leaft
10.He...TV when the phone rang.


A. watched B. is watching C. was watching D. watches


<i><b>III.Reading.</b></i>


<i><b> Read the passage and answer the questions below.(2,5 pts)</b></i>


The pyramid of Khufu ( Cheops in Greek )is the largest, oldest and only true surviving member of
the seven wonders of the Ancient World. It was built in the 26th century BC. It held the world's
tallest man - made structure title for over 4400 years until 1889 when the Eiffel Tower was built .
The base area of Khufu's Pyramid is equal in size to that of six big - city blocks. Most of the
chiseled stones used to build this pyramid are as big as small pickup trucks. The rugged exterior
we see today on Pharaoh Khufu's tomb was originally covered by a beautiful smooth limestone
surfacing.


1. Is the pyramid of Khufu a wonder of the Ancient World?


...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

2. When was it built?


...
3.How long did it hold the world's tallest man - made structure title?



...
4.Which is taller: the pyramid of Khufu or the Eiffel Tower?


...
5.What was the rugged exterior we see today on Pharaoh Khufu's tomb originally covered by?
...


<i><b>IV.Writing.</b></i>


<i><b>Chage these following sentences in to reported speech.(3pts)</b></i>


1." I am a student ". he said


He said ...
2." I can swim very well ". She said


She said...
3." I play football every afternoon". Hung said


Hung said...
4." I am writing English now ". Nam said


Nam


said ...
5." We have to learn harder ".they said


They



said...


Date : 1 / 4 / 2009


Period 90 . Test Correction


<b>I. Pronunciation</b> :Total 2,5 marks, each question 0.5 mark


1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5.C


<b>II. Language focus</b>. Total 2,5 marks, each question 0,25 mark


1. A 2. C 3. C 4. C 5.C 6.C 7.B 8.A 9.B 10.C


<b> III.Reading</b>. Total 2,5 marks, each question 0.5 mark


1.Yes, it is


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

3. It held the world's tallest man - made structure title for over 4400 years
4. The Eiffel Tower


5. The rugged exterior we see today on Pharaoh Khufu's tomb was originally covered by a
beautiful smooth limestone surfacing.


<i><b> IV. Writing.</b></i><b> </b><i>Total 3marks, each question 0.5 mark</i>


1.He said he was a student.
2.She said she could swim well.



3.Hung said he played football every afternoon.
4. Nam said he was writing English then.
5.They said they had to learn harder.


Date: 2/4/
2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


To get Ss to differentiate facts from opinions through reading.
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express their opinions about a
problem


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:


printer, manual, socket, guarantee, connect


- Grammar/ Structure: Review present perfect tense
<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>



<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Getting started: Brainstorm</b></i>


Computers can help us:
+ Save time …


T


<b>151</b>


<b>Unit 15 : </b>

<b>Computers</b>



<b>Lesson 1 :Getting started + Listen and </b>
<b>Read(P. 138)</b>


<b>Period 91</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Suggestions:


+ Computers help us learn interestingly
+ Computers help us learn more quickly


+ Computers are convenient/ easy for keeping/ sorting
information


+ Computer are very quick in giving answers to our questions


Ss


<b></b>



<b>Pre-reading</b> <i><b> Listen and read</b></i>Pre-teach vocabulary
+ printer (picture)


+ manual (explanation/ realia)


(a book coming with a machine tells you how to use/ operate
the machine)


+ connect (hand gesture)
+ guarantee (situation)


(The machine you buy at a shop will be under guarantee
from 6 to 12 months)


+ socket (picture/ realia)
Checking technique: Bingo


<i> True/ False prediction. </i>
-Set the scene:


“Nam and his father, Mr. Nhat are talking about the problem
of the computer they’ve just bought. What happens to the
computer?”


-Put the chart on the board and have Ss guess which
statements are true and which are false.


1. The printer isn’t working



2. Nam has already turned the computer on


3. Nam knows how to connect a printer but he hasn’t
connected it properly


4. The manual helped them to find out the problem.


5. Mr. Nhat bought the computer in HCM City and it’s still
under guarantee


6. Mr. Nhat thinks the company wouldn’t do anything with
his computer because it’s too far from his place.


Ss


T – Ss


T


Ss


<b>3. </b>
<b>While-reading</b>


-Ask Ss to open their books, read the dialogue on page 138


and listen to the tape


-Have Ss work in pairs again to check if their guesses are
right or not



-Give feedback and correct
*Answer key:


1. T
2. T


3. F  Nam knows how to connect a printer and he has
connected it properly


4. F  Mr. Nhat thinks it isn’t very helpful
5. T


6. F  Mr. Nhat thinks the company should do something
with it


<i><b> Reading comprehension</b></i>


-Explain the words: “Fact and Opinion”


+Fact: a thing that is known to be true, especially when it
can be proved


+Opinion: your feeling or thoughts about someone or
something, rather then a fact


- Get Ss to read the statements and check () the suitable


Ss



T – Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

boxes


-Call on some Ss to give their answers
<i>*Answer key</i>


Fact Opinion


a/ ………  


b/ ………  


c/ ………  


d/ ………  


e/ ………  


f/ ………  


T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>Post-reading</b> -Ask Ss to use reported speech to rewrite the dialogue<i><b>Write it up</b></i>


-Divide the class into 3 groups and assign each group to report
about 3  4 sentences



-Have them write their report on a poster and put it on the board
for public check


Ss


<b>Homework</b> -Learn the new word


-Do exercise in workbook Ss


Date:5/04/
2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and
disagreement


<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use some common useful
expressions to express agreement and


<b> *Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:


- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method



<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Guessing game</b></i> “Do you think that …?”


-Ask Ss each to think of one of the ways computers are helpful
and write it on a piece of paper


-Call on a student to the front of the class
-Get the rest of the class ask him/ her
“Do you think that computers are …?”


-The student can only answer with yes or no.


-Tell Ss the one to have the right guess will get one good mark
and go on answering the classmates/ questions


Ss


T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>Presenta-tion</b> <i><b>Speak</b></i>


<i><b>Brainstorm </b></i>



-Write the topic on the board: useful expressions to express T


<b>153</b>


<b>Unit 15 : </b>

<b>Computers</b>


<b>Lesson 2 :Speak and Listen (P. 139,140)</b>
<b>Period 92</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

agreement and disagreement


-Put the table on the board and elicit Ss’ answers then write
them in the table


Opinion Agreemen


t Degree of Agreemen
t


disagreement
I like …


I don’t like




I think …
I feel …
I don’t
believe



So do I
I agree
You’re
right
Neither
do I


I agree,
but …
Yes, but
on the
other hand


I disagree
I can’t agree
with you
No, I think


-Explain the phrase “on the other hand” to Ss
-Get Ss to copy the table


Ss


<i><b>Matching</b></i>


-Put the photocopied pictures (page 139) on the right of the
board and the words cues on the left (not in order)


-Ask Ss to match the words with the pictures


1/ Reading comic books d. 


2/ Playing in the rain a. 


3/ Driving a car b. 


4/ Foreign food c. 


*Answer key:


-Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the matching lines
1/ b 2/ c 3/ a 4/ d


T
Ss


T - Ss


<b>Practice</b> <i><b>Picture drill</b></i>


<i><b> Oral drill</b></i>


-Get a student to demonstrate the model (a)
T: I think driving a car is easy


P: I disagree. I think it’s difficult to drive a car or so do I
-Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express
their opinions after going through the meaning of some new
words



1/ entertaining
2/ time-consuming
3/ challenging


-Ask Ss to use the pictures on the board to practice speaking
with their partners


-Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class
-Give feedback and correct


+ Suggestion
a. Driving a car


Learning to drive a car - Easy once we get used to it- Challenging/ difficult to get
used to driving in traffic
- Dangerous


b. Comic books


Reading comic books - Boring- Interesting/ fun
- Time-consuming
c. Playing in the rain - Fun


- interesting
- Entertaining
d. Foreign food


Hamburgers, pizza, French
fries



- Delicious
- Fun to cat
- Unhealthy


Ss


T – Ss


Ss


T - Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>listening</b> <i><b>Pre-teach</b></i>


-Put the flow chart on the board and have Ss copy it into their
exercise books


-Get Ss to understand how events are sequenced in a flow chart
and the meanings of all the shapes used in the chart


Ss


<b> </b>


<b>While-listening</b> -Ask Ss to look at the flow chart and guess the words in the <i><b>Gap fill</b></i>
gaps


-Play the tape (2 or 3 times) and ask Ss to listen


-Tell Ss to fill the gaps with the information they have heard


from the tape


-Have Ss compare the answers with their partners
-Give feedback and correct


-Have Ss copy


Ss


T


<b>Post</b>


<i><b>a/ Post-listening</b></i>


Write it up


Have Ss write a set of instructions on how to get a drink from a
machine, using the flow chart


<i><b>b/ Post-speaking</b></i>


-Present the dialogue and have Ss repeat, sentence by sentence
-Call on one student to demonstrate the dialogue


-Open pair


-Closed pairs: Ss make similar dialogues referring the cues on
page 140 (below the dialogue) to replace the information
-Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board



 


I am having


problems with … What’s wrong?
It doesn’t work. I


think … No, You didn’t …


Oh! Sorry


Ss


<b>Homework</b> -Do exercises in workbook


-Prepare: Lesson 3: Read Ss




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

Date:5/04/
2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Reading comprehension.
<b>* Objective</b>:



By the end of the lesson, students will know more about how computers work in a
university.


<b> *Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary:Fresh man , Jack ,bulletion board ,skeptical ,impact
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm - up</b> <b>Brainstorming</b>


reading newspapers<b> </b>watching TV


playing games listening music


<b>Pre </b>


<b>-reading</b> <i><b>I.Preteach vocabulary</b></i>- Elicit words from Ss


- (a) Fresh man = the first-year student at a college/university.
- (a) Jack (translation)


- (a) bulletion board = notice board


- skeptical (adj) (translation)


- impact (nu):(translation)
Have Ss copy the vocabulary


<b>Checking technique</b>: <i><b>What and Where</b></i>


- Elicit words from ss and write them inside circles
- Get Ss to repeat and rub out the word, not the circle.
- Continue until the circles are empty.


- Get Ss to repeat the rubbed - out circles by pointing at the
empty circles.


- Have Ss fill in the circles on the board with the right words
again ( 5 ss at a time )


<i><b>II. Open prediction</b></i>


- Introduce the topic of the text


- Ask Ss to guess what they're going to read.


 <i><b>Suggested questions</b><b> :</b></i>


1. Where in the library do we get / find information?
2. How can we store the information?


3. If we want to discuss something,how can we do?



<b>T - Ss</b>


<b>T</b>


<b>Unit 15 : </b>

<b>Computers</b>


<b>Lesson 3 : Read (P. 141,142)</b>


<b>Period 93</b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<b>While </b>
<b>Reading</b>


<b>Post - </b>
<b>Reading</b>


- Write the Ss' guesses on the board


- Ask Ss to read the text to check if their guesses are correct or
not


<i><b>III. True/False Statements</b></i>


- Get Ss to read the text again then read the true/false
statements and decide if the statements are true or false.
- Call on some ss to give their answers and correct the false
statements


- Have Ss copy all the right statements in their notebooks.


Answer key


a) T
b) T
c) T


d) F: Student don't have to go to computer rooms because
college campuses now have computer jacks in every part
of the university


e) T
f) T


<i><b>IV. Comprehension questions </b></i>


- Have Ss read the questions on page 147 and find the
information in the text to answer


- Ask Ss to compare their answer with their partners
- Call on some Ss to give their answers for the class
- Give feed back and and correct


Answer Key:


a)It has no library. All the information normally found in a
library is now stored in the university's computers.


b)All the information normally found in a or messages
normally found on a bulletin board.



c) A computer and a telephone (line)


d)With a bulletin board on the Internet, a great number of
people ( over 20 million) can get access to the bulentin and
exchange information quickly.


e) Student's answers.


<b>Ss</b>


<b>T - Ss</b>


<b>Ss</b>


<b>Homework</b> - Write the answers in your notebooks.


- Do the exercises in the workbook, page <b>Ss</b>




Date:10/04/
2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


To get Ss to practice in writing instructions - listening for detail
<b>* Objective</b>:



<b>157</b>


<b>Unit 15 : </b>

<b>Computers</b>


<b>Lesson 4. Write: (P. 142,143)</b>


<b>Period 94</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a set of instructions on how to
use the printer and complete a flow chart.


<b> *Language focus</b>:


Vocabulary:paper input tray,power button,icon,output path, remove
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm - up</b> <b>Play game : </b><i><b>Shark's attack.</b></i>
<b> _ _ _ _ _ _ _</b>


Key word<b> : </b>Printer


T - Ss



<b>Pre </b>
<b>-Writing</b>


I.<i><b>Preteach Vocabulary.</b></i>


- paper input tray(picture)
- power button


- icon


- output path


- remove : to put (sth) away


<i><b>Checking technique: </b></i>


Matching


- Ask Ss to look at exercise 1 (p.142) and do the matching.
- Get some Ss to give their answers and correct.


Answer Key.


a) 3 b) 1 c) 6 d) 2 e) 4 f) 5


<i><b>II. Gap fill.</b></i>


- Get Ss to make sure of some phrasal verbs.


- Put the words on the board and ask Ss to fill in the gaps


with the right words if possible.


1. (to) wait...(so / sth)
2. (to) remove ...( sth )
3. (to) turn ...(a machine)
4. (to) plug...(sth)


5. (to) load ... ( sth)


- Ask some Ss to give their answers and correct.
Answer Key :


a) 3 b) 1 c) 6 d) 2 e ) 4 f) 5
Answer Key ;


1(to) wait for(so / sth)
2.(to) remove ( sth )


3.(to) turn on / off(a machine)
4.(to) plug in(sth)


5.(to) load ( sth)


T - Ss


Ss


T


Ss



T - Ss


<b>While </b>
<b>-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 143 and read the
cues.


- Have Ss work in pairs to outline the instructions.
- Call on some Ss to say out the instructions first.
- Ask Ss to write the instructions in their notebooks.
- Have some Ss read their writing before the class.
- Give feebback and correct.


<i>Answer Key:</i>


- Plug in the printer and turn on the power.


- Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

paper input tray.


- Wait for the power button to flash.


- Have the pages appear on the computer screen


- Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few


seconds.


- The printed paper will get out from the outpath in a
minute.


<b>Post </b>


<b>-listening</b> - Have Ss to write a set of instructions on how to get a drink from a machine, using the flow chart. Ss


<b>Homework</b> - Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class


- Do the exercises in the workbook. Ss


Date:10/04/ 2009


<b> *Aim</b> :


Further practice in using the present perfect.
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use "yet" and "already" to express
the present perfect.


<b> *Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:review


- Grammar/ Structure: Present perfect.


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method



<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Presenta</b>
<b>tion</b>


<b>1</b>


<b>Language focus 1.</b>
<b>1.Set the scene.</b>


" Ba's the mother has just been back from market. She wanted
him to do some housework while she was at the market.Ba
made notes in his diary and check (v) the work he has done .
look at Ba's diary"


- Show the chart( Ba's diary) ont the board.


T


<b>159</b>


<b>Unit 15 : </b>

<b>Computers</b>


<b>Lesson 5. Language focus (P.144 - 146)</b>
<b>Period 95</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<b>Practice</b>


- Ask questions and elicit the answers from Ss.
T: Has ba done his homework yet?


S: Yes, he has already done his homework.
T: Has ba tidied the room yet?


S: No, he hasn't tidied the room yet.


- Have Ss repeat and write the sentences on the board.


<b>-Concept Check</b><i><b>:</b></i>


Present perfect with yet and already.


<i><b>Use</b></i> : Yet : used in question and negative statements.
Already : used in positive statements.


<i><b>Positions</b></i>: Yet : at the end of the sentence.


already : between auxiliary have and past participle, at the
end of the sentences.


- Have Ss copy.


<i><b>II. Gap Fill Dialogue.</b></i>


- Ask Ss to look at Ba's diary and complete the dialogue


using Yet and Already.


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue for the
class.


- Give feedback and correct.


T - Ss


T


Ss


<b>Presenta</b>
<b>tion 2</b>


<b>Question and answer:</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the flight information tables and ask
questions to show the models.


T: Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet?
S: Yes, it has already departed.


T: Has the flight from los Angeles arrived yet/
S: No, it hasn't arrived yet.


- Ask Ss to talk in turn to ask and answer the questions.
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate the exchanges in front of



the class.


- Give feedback and correct.


T - Ss


S - S


<b>Presenta</b>
<b>tion 3</b>


<b>Practice</b>


<b>Set the scene:</b>


 Use Vietnamese to elicit the models:
1.I've ever been to Dalat .(finished)


2.My parents have gone to Dalat for 3 days (incomplete)


<b>Concept check</b> : present perfect tense.


<i><b>Use </b></i>: finished actions - indefinite time


- incomplete actions - for ,since, recently


<i><b>Form</b></i> : have / has + past participle.
- Have Ss copy.


<b>Grammar drill</b>.



- Ask Ss to look at the table on page 146, read the
sentences and check (v) the correct column.
- Call on some Ss to give their answers.
- Give feedback and correct.


T - Ss


Ss


<b>Presenta</b>


<b>tion 4</b> <b>Language focus 4.Revision.</b>


- Put the chart on the board ans ask Ss to read the
sentences.


- Ask Ss to decide which sentence is in the present perfect


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<b>Practice</b>


and which is past simple.


1. Her family moved to Ha Noi 2 years ago.


2. My brother has become more independent since he
left home.


Answer key :



1: Past simple - finished action with definite time.


2: Present perfect - an action (not) taking place from the past to
the present.


<b>Grammar Drill.</b>


- Ask Ss to complete the dialogues on page 146 orally.
- Call on some pairs to give their answers.


- Give feedback and correct.


- Have some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues for the
class.


Ss


T - Ss


Ss


<b>Homework</b> - Do exercises in the workbook Ss
Date:14/04/
2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss can know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing


something. <b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use some common useful
expressions to express agreement and


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary:(v) Remove, crush, liquefy, grind, manufacture
(n) process, mold


- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warn up</b> <i><b> Quiz </b></i>–<i><b> Who did it?</b></i>


-Divide the class into 2 teams


-Tell Ss the team raising their hands first(after the teacher
finishes the question) will have the right to answer the question
-Inform the questions:


“Who was the inventor of ………?”
or “Who invented ………?”


Suggestions


1/ Steam engine  Thomas Savery built the first steam engine in
1698 and later Watt improved it


2/ Light bulb  Humphry Davy, an English scientist, in 1800
3/ Sewing machine  Isaac Meritt Singer (1850)


4/ Aqalung  Jacques  Yves Cousteau in 1943
5/ Telephone  A. Graham Bell


T


T – Ss


<b>161</b>


<b>Unit 16 : </b>

<b>Inventions</b>



<b>Lesson 1 :Getting started + Listen and Read</b>
<b>(P.147)</b>


<b>Period 96</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b></b>


<b>Pre-reading</b> <i><b>Getting started</b></i>-Get Ss to look at the pictures on page 147 and ask them some
questions to evaluate how much they understand the pictures


Suggestions:



-Where are they from? (picture a, b, c, e)
-What is the man in picture (a) doing?
-What is it? (d)


-Ask Ss to read the sentences (A  E) and match them with the
correct pictures


-Call on some Ss to give their answers
-Give feedback and correct


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


A. b D. a
B. c E. d
C. e


Ss


T – Ss


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Pre </b>


<b>-Reading</b> <i><b>Listen and read 1,2</b><b>Pre-teach vocabulary</b></i>


1/ (to) remove


2/ (to) crush
3/ (to) liquefy
4/ (to) grind


 to grind –ground
ground


5/ (to) manufacture = (to) produce
(Use the flowchart to explain the word)
6/ (a) process  manufacturing process
7/ (a) mold (realia/ picture …)


8/ conveyor belt (picture)


*<i><b>Checking technique:</b></i> Slap the board
<i>Open prediction</i>


-Set the scene:


“Tim Jones, Hoa’s American pen pal, is visiting a chocolate
factory with his class and his teacher. Mrs. Allen. Now, guess
who will show them around the factory and what they will learn
from this visit


-Write the Ss’ predictions on the board


T


T – Ss



Ss


T


T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>While-reading</b> <i><b>Matching</b></i>-Play the tape and ask Ss to listen while reading the dialogue on
page 148


-Ask Ss to match the half sentences on page 149
-Have Ss compare their answer with their pictures
-Call on Ss to give their answers for the class
-Give feedback and correct


-Get Ss to write the full sentences in their exercise notebooks
*Answer key:


E a/ The beans are cleaned before being cooked


D b/ Mr. Roberts thought Tim and Sam were going to touch
the button


C c/ After cooking, the cocoa bean smell like chocolate
F d/ Sugar is one of the ingredients in chocolate


B e/ Mrs. Allen warned Sam to leave some chocolate for
others



A f/ A sample of chocolate is given after visitor have toured


T


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

the factory


<b></b>


<b>Post-reading</b> -Put the grid on the board and have Ss copy<i><b>Grid</b></i>


-Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and fill in the grid


CHOCOLATE MANUFACTURING PROCESS


*Answer key:


1/ The beans are washed, weighed and cooked
2/ The shells are removed


3/ The beans are crushed and liquefied


4/ Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added


5/ The mixture is ground, rolled and pound into the molds
-Call on some pairs to go to the board to write their answers
-Give feedback and correct


T – Ss



Ss


<b>Homework</b> -Learn the new words
-Do exercises in workbook
-Prepare: Lesson 2: Speak


Ss


Date:14/04/ 2009


<b>163</b>


<b>Unit 16 : </b>

<b>Inventions</b>


<b>Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen(P149, 150)</b>
<b>Period 97</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>



<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss can know the. using of the passive
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the inventions using the
passive


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary:



(n) Facsimile, reinforced concrete, microphone, X-ray, loudspeaker, helicopter
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Bingo (revision)</b></i>


Get Ss to brainstorm a list of 10 words and write them on the
board


(foreman, process, manufacture, remove, crush, liquefy, grind,
pour, mold, conveyor belt)


-Ask Ss to choose any 4 words and copy them their paper
-Call out the words until someone has ticked all of his/her
words and shouts “bingo”


T - Ss


<b>Presenta</b>


<b>tion</b> 1/ Facsimile<i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary</b></i>
2/ Reinforced concrete
3/ Microphone



4/ X-ray
5/ Loudspeaker


6/ Helicopter


<i><b>Grammar Awareness</b></i>


-Ask Ss to read the dialogue on page 148 again and pick out all
of the passive sentences


-Call on Ss to give their answer


-Have Ss review the passive in the present and past simple
tenses


*Answer key:


1/ This is where the cocoa beans are stored (present simple)
2/ That button can not be touched (passive with model)
3/ The beans are washed, weighed and cooked here
4/ After the shells are removed … into molds


T – Ss


Ss


T – Ss


<b>Practice</b> <i><b>Word-cue drill</b></i>



-Have Ss to read the model dialogue on page 149


-Let Ss know what they are going to do: ask and answer


questions about the inventions to fill in the missing information
-Ask Ss to look at the tables on page 150 and 156 and model
the exchanges, using a good student


1/ T: What was invented by Friedrich Koenig?
S: Printing Press


T: When was it invented?
S: In 1810


S: Where was Koenig from?
T: He was from Germany


Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

8/ S: What was invented by C.W.Rice in 1924?
T: Loudspeaker


S: Where is C.W.Rice from?
T: The USA


-Have Ss work in pair, one looks at the table on page 150 and
the other page 156


-Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions orally the fill in the


missing information


-Monitor and help Ss if necessary


-Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges
-Give feedback and correct


-Have Ss copy the complete table
*Answer key:


INVENTION DATE INVETOR NATIONALITY
Printing


Press 1810 Friedrich Koenig German
Bicycle 1816 Karl D.


Sanerbronn German
Facsimile 1843 Alexander


Bain English
Sewing


machine 1845 Elias Howe American
Reinforced


concrete 1849 F.J Monier French
Microphone 1878 D.E.


Hughes American
X-ray 1895 Wilhelm



Konarad German
Loudspeaker 1924 C.W.Rice American
Helicopter 1939 Igor


Sikorsky American
Color


television 1950 Peter Carl Goldmark American
Optical fiber 1955 Narinder


Kapany German
Laser 1958 Gordon


Gould American


Ss


T


<b>Production</b> <i><b>Making reports</b></i>


-Model and have Ss repeat


-Ask Ss to use the complete table to report what they have
found


Eg: The printing Press was invented by Friedrich Koenig in
1810



T - Ss


<b>Homework</b> -Use the information in the table to write 12 complete sentences
in the …


-Prepare: Lesson 3


Ss


Date:18/04/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> :


Ss can fill in the gaps and order sentences
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to fill in the gaps and order sentences


<b>*Language focus</b>:


<b>165</b>


<b>Unit 16 : </b>

<b>Inventions</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : Read (P 150,151)</b>
<b>Period 98</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

- Vocabulary:



(n) Microwave, vacuum, toaster
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> -T. has Ss read the model dialogue on page 149


-Let Ss know what they are going to do: ask and answer
questions about the inventions


T: What was invented by Friedrich Koenig?
S: Printing Press


T: When was it invented?
S: In 1810


S: Where was Koenig from?
T: He was from Germany


T


T - Ss



<b></b>


<b>Pre-reading</b> <i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary: Brainstorm</b></i>


Microwave


1/ Microwave (n)
2/ Vacuum (n)
3/ Toaster (n)


<i>Checking techniques: Bingo</i>


-Get Ss to brainstorm a list of 10 new words and write them on
the board


-Ask Ss to choose any 4/5 words and copy them into their paper
-Call out the words until someone has ticked all of their words
and shout “Bingo” and wins


Suggested words: microwave, vacuum, hairdryer, dishwasher,
telephone, toaster, washing machine …


T – Ss


Ss


T - Ss


<b></b>



<b>While-reading</b> <i><b>Matching</b></i>-Get Ss some questions to help them understand the reading
more


+ What’s the 1st verse about?


+ Is the 2nd verse about the appliances used in the kitchen?
+ What are “doom, chugga-chug, vroom, boom”?


-Have Ss match the headings to the verses on page 152
-Call on Ss to give their answers


-Give feedback and correct
*Answer key:


+Verse 1: b. Appliances that cook food


+Verse 2: c. Appliances that clean or dry things


+Verse 3: a. Instrument invented by Alexander Graham Bell


Ss


T – Ss


<b></b>


<b>Post-reading</b> <i>Gap-fill</i>


-Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully and fill in the gaps with
the inventions taken from the poem



-Have Ss compare their answers with their partners
-Call on Ss to give their answer and correct


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

*Answer key:


1/ Vacuum 4/ Microwave


2/ Telephone 5/ Hair dryer
3/ Washing machine 6/ Toaster


<b>Homework</b> -Do exercises in the workbook


-Prepare: Lesson 5: Write Ss


Date:20/04/
2009




<b> *Aim</b> : Ss can use the sequence markers to describe a manufacturing
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the sequence markers to
describe a manufacturing


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: log, flatten , chemically
- Grammar/ Structure:



<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>Jumble words</b></i>


1. =


2.


=
3. =


T – Ss


Ss


<b>167</b>


<b>Unit 16 : </b>

<b>Inventions</b>


<b>Lesson 4 : Write (P 153,153)</b>


<b>Period 99</b>





lppu


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

4. =
5. =


<i><b> *Answer key:</b></i>


1/ pulp 4/ drain
2/ roller 5/ fibre
3/ remove


<b>Pre-writing</b> <i><b>WRITE 1</b></i>


<i>Pre-teach vocabulary</i>


+ (a) log (drawing/ explanation)


(a thick piece of wood that is cut from a tree)
+ flatten (v) (translation)


(to make sth become flat)


+ chemically (adv) (translation)
(treat in chemical process)


<i><b>Checking techniques: Rub out and remember</b></i>


<i><b>Gap fill</b></i>



-Ask Ss to read the text on page 152 and fill in the gaps with
the right sequence markers to describe the procedure of
paper-making


-Ask Ss some question to check if they understand the text
+ What is cut into chips?


+ What are chips mixed with before they are crushed to
heavy pulp?


+ Why is the passed through rollers?
+ What is the last step in paper-making?
<i>*Answer key:</i>


1/ First 4/ After this
2/ Then 5/ Then
3/ Next 6/ Finally


<i><b>WRITE 2</b></i>


<i>Ordering pictures</i>


- Have Ss look at the picture on page 153


-Ask Ss to think of the process of chocolate making and put
the pictures in the correct order


-Call on some pairs to give their answers


-Ask Ss to listen to check if their answers are correct or not


-Read the statements aloud


d. The fruit harvest is fermented for 3 to 9 days to kill the
beans and turn them brown


a. The beans are dried in the sun


e. The beans are cleared in special machines


c. The beans are roasted to bring out the chocolate flavor
b. They are shelled and ground to produce chocolate liquor
f. The liquor is made into chocolate candy or cocoa powder
*Answer key:


6 – 2 – 4 – 1 – 5 – 3


T – Ss


Ss


T – Ss


Ss


<b></b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

the ordered pictures


-Call on Ss to give their answer



-Have Ss use the sequence makers to link the sentences
together in a paragraph


-Monitor and assist Ss if necessary


-Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class
-Give feedback and correct


-Have Ss copy
*Answer key:


1/ d 4/ c
2/ a 5/ b
3/ e 6/ f


T


Ss


T - Ss


<b></b>


<b>Post-writing</b> -Ask Ss to use the pictures and the word cues on page 155 to <i><b>Word cue drill (language focus 4)</b></i>
write a description of how white rice is produced in the
traditional way, using the sequence markers


-Have Ss complete the sentences orally first


-Ask Ss to write the paragraph in their exercises notebook


-Monitor while Ss are writing and help if necessary


-Call on some Ss to read their writing
-Give feedback and correct


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


First, the rice crop is harvested. Then the rice plants are
threshed (to separate the grains from the straw). Next (after
this), the rice grains are husked in the mill to produce brown
rice. After this, the bran is removed in the mortar and it is
finally winnowed to produce white rice


Ss


T - Ss


<b>Homework</b> -Do exercises in workbook


-Prepare: Lesson 6: Language focus Ss


V


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

Date:20/04/ 2009




<b> *Aim</b> : Ss can change active sentences into passive ones and write Wh-questions in
the passive



<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to change active sentences into passive
ones and write Wh-questions in the passive


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary:run a business/ company ,around the corner ,due to ,floor, zipper
- Grammar/ Structure:


<b>* Teaching method</b>:Communicative method


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up</b> <i><b>. Warm up</b></i>


<i><b>Pelmanism</b></i>


-Inform the topic: infinitive – past participle
-Divide the class into 2 teams


<b>Infinitive</b>


Write
Draw
Sell


Win
Run


<b>Past participle</b>


Written
Drawn


Sold
Won
Run


T – Ss


Ss


<b>Presenta</b>
<b>tion</b>


<i><b>LANGUAGE FOCUS</b></i>
<i><b>I. Pre-teach vocabulary</b></i>


1/ run a business/ company (translation)
2/ around the corner = very near


3/ due to = because of
4/ floor (n) (situation)
5/ zipper (realia)


6/ xerography (translation)



<i><b>Checking technique: slap the board</b></i>


T – Ss
<b>Unit 16 : </b>

<b>Inventions</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : Language focus (P 153,153)</b>
<b>Period 100</b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

Ss


<b>Practice</b> <i><b>Language focus 1:</b></i>


Have Ss to do exercise 1 on page 154


-Call on some Ss to give their answers orally for the class
-Get some Ss to go to the board and write the sentences
-Give feedback and correct


<i> *Answer key:</i>


a/ The document was typed by (Mrs. Quyen)
b/ The computer was repair (by Mr.Nhan)
c/ The picture was drawn (by Ba)


d/ The flights were turned off (by Hoa)
e/ The cake was baked (by Lan)



<i><b> Language focus 2:</b></i>


Have Ss do exercise 2


-Ask Ss to compare their answers


-Call on some Ss to give their answers orally then ask them to
go to the board and write the sentences


-Give feedback and correct
*Answer key:


a/ … was awarded
b/ … won …
c/ … ran …


d/ … was run … / was sold …
f/ … was closed (or closed) …


<i><b> Language focus 3:</b></i>


-Have Ss to do exercises 3


-Go through the underlined words with Ss before have them
write questions


Eg:


a/ The zipper  what
b/ Maize  what



in the 16th century  when
c/ by Lewis Waterman  who
in 1884  when


trang nay sai



Ss


T – Ss


Ss


T – Ss


T - Ss


<b>171</b>


Around the
corner


Xerography


Due to Floor


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

d/ in Hungary  where


e/ in copying machines  in which machine
*Answer key:



a/ What was invented by W.L Judson in 1893?


b/ What was brought in to Viet Nam by Phung Khac Khoan?
When was maize brought into Vietnam?


d/ Where was the ball point pen invented?


e/ In which machine is xerography widely used?


<b>Production</b> <i><b>Transformation drill (language focus 3)</b></i>


-Have Ss change the passive sentences into the active ones
-Call on some Ss to go to the board and write their sentences
<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


a/ W.L Judson invented the zipper in 1893


b/ Phung Khac Khoan broght maize into Vietnam in the 16th
century


c/ Lewis Waterman invented the fountain pen in 1884


d/ Brothers Lazio and Gearge Biro invented the ballpoint pen in
Hungary in 1935


e/ People use xerography widely in commerce and industry in
copying machines


Ss



T - Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

Date:25/4/ 2009


<b> *Aim</b> :


- To help Ss practice in use Reported speech
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :


- consolidate some new points of grammar they have learnt.


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: Review
- Grammar/ Structure:
Reported speech.


<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm up </b> <b>Play game : "Shark's attack " </b>
<b>_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _</b>



<i><b>Reported speech</b></i>


<b>T - Ss</b>


<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b>Period 101</b>

<b> :Review for the </b>


<b>sencond term test</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

<b>Presentation</b>


<b>2</b> <b>*Direct and Reported speech.</b>


<i><b>Changes in tense.</b></i>


<i><b>Direct speech</b></i> <i><b>Reported speech</b></i>


Present simple
I walk


Past simple
I walked
Present progressive


I am walking


Past Progressive
I was walking
Past simple



I walked


Past simple / Past perfect
I walked / I had walked
Past Progressive


I was walking


Past Progressive / Past
perfect progressive


I was walking / I had been
walking


Present perfect
I have walked


Past perfect
I had walked


Here and now words in reported speech.


Direct speech Reported speech
Time now


today
tonight
tomorrow
yesterday
last night


two days ago


then / immediately
that day


that night


the next day / the
following day


the day before / the
previous day


the night before
two days before /
earlier


Place here there



Demonstra-tive


Heads


this
these


that
those



<b>T</b>
<b>T - Ss</b>


<b>T - Ss</b>


<b>Practice2</b> <i><b>Here are something that Ann said to you.Rewrite, using </b></i>
<i><b>reported speech.</b></i>


1.“I will send you a portcard If I go to London”
2.“I can't drive”


3.“Jane is a friend of mine”


4.“I'm working tomorrow evening”
5.“I don't have any brothers or sisters”
6.“I don't like fish”


7.“Dave is lazy”


T
S - S


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

8.“Jane has a very well-paid job.”


9.. “I want to go on holiday but I can't afford it.”
10. “I'll tell Mary I saw you.”


-Ss work in pairs.
-Ss give feedback.
-Correct together.



T - Ss


<b> Consolida</b>
<b>tion&</b>
<b>Homework</b>


-Sum up the content of the lesson.
-Ss prepare for the test


<b>Ss</b>


Date:25/4 2009


<b> *Aim</b> :


- To help Ss practice in use passive form
<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :


- consolidate some new points of grammar they have learnt.


<b>*Language focus</b>:


- Vocabulary: Review
- Grammar/ Structure:


Passive form : be + past participate



<b>*Teaching aids</b> : Text book, cards,pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b>Period 102</b>

<b> :Review for the </b>


<b>sencond term test</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm - up</b> <i><b>I.Face to face</b></i>


- Two Ss stand face to face to play this game.
- T give the question:


(Name the tenses you have learnt)


- Which student can list more tenses will be the winner


<b>T - Ss</b>


<b>Presentation</b>
<b>1</b>


<b>Passive form</b>
<b>Form : </b>


<b>be + past participle</b>



<b> </b>


<b> S + V + O</b>
<b> </b>


<b> S + be + PP + by agent</b>
<i><b>1.</b></i>Passive voice of Present Simple tense.


<i><b>S + am/ is / are + P2 + (by agent)</b></i>
<i><b>2. </b></i>Passive voice of Present Progressive.


<i><b>S + am/ is / are + being + P2 + (by agent)</b></i>
<i><b>3. </b></i>Passive voice of simple past.


<i><b>S + was / were + P2 + (by agent)</b></i>
<i><b>4.</b></i>Passive voice of. Past progressive.


<i><b>S + was / were + being + P2 + (by agent)</b></i>
<i><b>5.</b></i>Passive voice of Present perfect<i><b>.</b></i>


<i><b>S + have / has + been +P2 + (by agent)</b></i>
<i><b>6. </b></i>Passive voice of modal verbs.


<i><b> can / could</b></i>
<i><b> may / might</b></i>


<i><b> S + will / would + be + P2</b></i>
<i><b> shall / should</b></i>



<i><b> must</b></i>


<b>Ss</b>


<b>T - Ss</b>


<b>Practice</b> <b>Re write the sentences in the passive.</b>


1.We check the aeroplanes every month.


The aeroplanes...
2.They clean these rooms every evening.


These rooms...
3.I'll give him some new clothes.


He ...
4. The police arrested those thieves.


T
S - S


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

Those thives...
5. I will give you that book tomorrow.


You...
6. You should finish your home work before you go to


school.



Your homework...


<b>Answer key: </b>


1. The aeroplanes are checked everymonth.
2. These rooms are cleaned every evening.
3. He will be given some new clothes.
4. Those thives were arrested by the police.
5. You will be given that book tomorrow.


6. Your homework should be finished before you go to
school.


-Ss work in pairs.
-Ss give feedback.
-Correct together.


T - Ss


<b> Consolida</b>
<b>tion&</b>
<b>Homework</b>


<b>- </b>Sum up the content of the lesson.
- Ss prepare for the test


Ss


Date:5/5/ 2009



<b> *Aim</b> :


To help Ss practice in use passive form, Reported speech and some points of
grammar.


<b>* Objective</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :


- consolidate some new points of grammar they have learnt.


<b>*Language focus</b>:
- Vocabulary: Review


- Grammar/ Structure:


- Passive form : be + past participate
- Reported speech.


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>Stage</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b> <b>Interaction</b>


<b>Warm - up</b> <i><b>Chineses whisper.</b></i>


<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b> Period 103</b>

<b> :Review for the </b>


<b>second term test</b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

- Choose about 5 Ss for each team.
- Ss stand in 2 rows for 2 teams.


- T will say in silent a sentence for the first student and he /
she has to say again for other student and contiue until the last
student.


- The last student has to go to the board and write down the
sentence.


- Which team can write the right sentence will be the winner.


<b>Sentence</b> : The house was painted yesterday.
- Introduce to the new lesson.(Passive)


T - Ss


<b>Practice1</b>


<b>Practice 2</b>


<b>Passive voice</b>


<i><b>Exercise 1.Rewrite the sentensec, putting the verbs in the</b></i>
<i><b>passive. </b></i>


1. My car / damage / last night.
My car was damaged last night.
2. The machines / make / in Scotland.



3. The money / change into dollars / at the bank.
4. Cheese / make / from / milk.


5. The children / give / some food.
6. The house / paint / every year.


7. Several people / hurt / in an accident last night<i><b>.</b></i>
-Ss work in pairs.


-Ss give feedback.
<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


2. The machines were made in Scotland.


3. The money was changed into dollars at the bank.
4. Cheese is made from milk.


5. The children were given some food.
6. The house is painted every year.


7. Several people were hurt in an accident last night.
<i><b>Reported speech</b></i>


<i><b>Exercise 1.Put the statements into reported speech,as in the </b></i>
<i><b>example.</b></i>


"I'm tired" she said.


She said (that) she was tired.



1."I can't swim very well" I told her.


2."I don't want to go swimming" Andrew said
3. "We're leaving on Friday"we said


4. "We will have lunch in Luigi's restaurant" they said.
5."I am leaving in london now" Janet said


-Ss work in pairs.
-Correct together.
<i><b>*Answer key: </b></i>


T - Ss


Ss


T - Ss


T


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

1. I told her that I couldn't swim very well.


2. Andrew said that he didn't want to go swimming.
3. We said we were leaving on Friday.


4. They said they would have lunch in Luigi's restaurant.
5. Janet said she was living in
London then.



<b>Practice 3</b>


<i><b>1.Rewrite these folowing sentences, beginning as sohown, </b></i>
<i><b>so that the meaning stay the same.</b></i>


1" Can you carry these chairs in to the house?" said Tam.
Mr Tam asked his neighbor...
2. A French architect designed our house.


Our house was...
3.I'd like you to decorate the Christmas tree.


Do you mind...?
4.The question is so difficult that the boy can't answer it.
The question is too...
5.We haven't met each other for ages.


It's ages...
6.We haven't been to the cinema for two months.


...


T
T - Ss


<b>Consolida</b>
<b>tion&</b>
<b>Homework</b>


-Sum up the content of the lesson.



-Ss prepare for the test <b>Ss</b>


Date : 2/ 5 / 09


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

I.<b>Ma trËn.</b>


<b>Chủ đề</b> <b>Nhận biết</b> <b>Thông hiểu</b> <b>Vận dụng</b> <b>Total </b>


KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL


I.


Pronunciation
5



2




5


2


II. Language
focus


10


2,5


10

2,5
III. Reading



5

2,5


5



2,5


IV. Writing 5


3
5


3


<b>Total</b> 15



4,5


5




2,5


5



3


25

10


<b>Full name:...</b> <b>khánh thành JUNIOR HIGH </b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>Class: 8...</b> <b>ENGLISH SECOND SEMESTER TEST</b>
<b> SCHOOL YEAR : 2008-2009</b>
<b>Marks: ... ENGLISH 8 Time allowed: 45 minutes </b>


<i><b>I.Pronunciation </b></i>


<b>Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the </b>
<b>others.(2pts)</b>


1.A. skept<b>i</b>cal B. l<b>i</b>quify C. s<b>i</b>ghtseeing D.p<b>i</b>ck up
2. A. d<b>e</b>gree B.fr<b>e</b>shman C. r<b>e</b>move D. r<b>e</b>use
3. A. c<b>o</b>ncern B. c<b>o</b>nnect C. m<b>o</b>ld D.c<b>o</b>nduct
4. A. j<b>a</b>ck B. sep<b>a</b>rate C.<b>a</b>ward D.roy<b>a</b>l



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

5. A. h<b>u</b>sk B. cr<b>u</b>sh C.p<b>u</b>lp D. b<b>u</b>lletin
<b>II.</b>


<b> </b><i><b>Language focus.</b></i>


<i><b>Circle the best option A,B,C or D to complete each of the following sentences </b></i>
<i><b>(2.5pts)</b></i>


1. Would you mind ...the windows?


A. to close B. closing C. close D. closed
2. He used ...chess when he was young.


A. to play B. played C. playing D. play
3. Have you ever ...The London Tower.


A. visit B. to visit C. visited D. visiting
4. This house ...last year.


A. built B. was built C. is building D. is built
5. I don’t know where ...


A. go B. to go C. went D. going
6. When I...he was watching TV last night.


A. come B. came C. to come D. coming
7. This doll is made ...China.


A. in B. on C. at D. to
8.She asked me whether I ...Sapa.



A. know B. knew C. knowing D. known
9. Have you read that book...?


Yes, I have


A. already B. yet C. for D. since
10.Ngan asked me ... Ha Long Bay was in Northern Viet Nam
A. as B. if C. so D. that


<i><b>III.Reading.</b></i>


<i><b> Read the passage and answer the questions below.(2,5 pts)</b></i>


<i>Christmas is the biggest festival of the year in most of Britain. Celebration starts </i>
<i>properly on 24 December, Christmas Eve. It is a family celebration and many of the</i>
<i>customs center on children. When they go to bed on Christmas Eve, children hang </i>
<i>up a pillow case or a sack for their presents. While the children are asleep,Father </i>
<i>Christmas climbs down the chimney and puts presents in the sacks that the children</i>
<i>have left out.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<i>1.On which day does the Christmas begin?</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>.</i>


<i>2.What do children do before going to bed on Christmas Eve?</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>..</i>



<i>3.How does Father Christmas enter the house?</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>.</i>


<i>4.Which day is the biggest day of the holiday?</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>.</i>


<i>5.What is Christmas pudding made from?</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>.. </i>


<i><b>IV.Writing.</b></i>


<i><b>Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as show, so that the meaning stay the</b></i>
<i><b>same.(3pts)</b></i>


1." I can speak English fluently "Linh said


Linh said...
2.Could you send this letter for me?


Do you mind...?
3.Alexandra Gustarve designed Eiffel Tower in 1889.


Eiffel Tower...


4." Do many tourists visit My Son every year? ".Nam asked Lan


Nam asked


Lan...
5.The last time I met him was 2 years ago.


I haven't...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

Date : 2 / 5 / 2009




Period 105 . Test Correction


<b>I. Pronunciation</b> :Total 2 marks, each question 0.4 mark
1. C 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. D


<b>II. Language focus</b>. Total 2,5 marks, each question 0,25 mark
<i>1.B 2.A 3.C 4.B 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.B 9.B 10.B</i>


<b> III.Reading</b>. Total 2,5 marks, each question 0.5 mark


<i>1. The Christmas begins properly on 24 December, Christmas Eve.</i>


<i>2. When they go to bed on Christmas Eve, children hang up a pillow case or a sack</i>
<i>for their presents. / Before going to bed, they hang up a pillow case or a sack for</i>
<i>their presents.</i>


<i>3. Father Christmas climbs down the chimney .</i>



<i>4. Christmas Day, December 25, is the biggest day of the holiday.</i>


<i>5. It is made from a dark, rich mixture of flour, fruit, sugar, nuts, and brandy.</i>


<i><b> IV. Writing.</b></i><b> </b><i>Total 3marks, each question 0.6 mark</i>
1 Linh said she could speak English fluently


2.Do you mind sending this letter for me?


3.Eiffel Tower was designed by Alexandra Gustarve in 1889.


4.Nam asked Lan If / Whether many tourists visited My Son everyyear.
5.I haven't met him for 2 years


Period 75 Lesson 2 : Speak


A / Aims and Objectives : BY the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their plans
for a trip abroad .


B / Teaching aids : Photocopied tables , chart ( mapped dialogue ) , realia ..
C / Procedure :


I / Warm up : Quiz


- Tell the student who can answer the question will get 1
or 2 good marks .


1. What is the end of everythin<b>g</b> ? ( letter g )



2. What word starts with T , ends with T , and is full of T ?
( <b>T</b>eapot ; <b>Pot</b> -> full of


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b>Period 73 Written test ( number 1 ) </b>


A / <b>Aims and Objectives</b> : <i>Ss can summarize knowledge they have learnt form unit 9 to unit </i>
<i>11 to do the test well . </i>


B / <b>Teaching aids</b> : <i>test paper , chalk ….</i>
C / <b>Test</b> :


- Deliver the test paper to students .


I / <b>Supply the correct form of the verbs</b> : ( 2,5 ps)
1. Would you mind if I ( take ) ……… a photo ?


2. Would you mind ( help ) ……… her to finish her homework ?
3. Do you mind if we ( get ) ………. a taxi to town ?


4. The cars ( make ) ……… from Japan are the best .
5. The man ( talk ) ……… to your teacher is my uncle .
II / <b>Rewrite these sentences as directed</b> : ( 2,0 ps )


1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind ………?


2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind ……….?
3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge ……….


4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ………
III <b>/ Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase</b> : ( 2,0 ps )


1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus .


2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English .
3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle .


4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city center .
IV / <b>Complete the sentences , using the given words or phrases</b> : ( 1,5 ps )
1. Last year class 11 A / have / terrible experience.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

2. One weekend / they decide / go / a picnic / Cuc Phuong National Park .
3. They / get out of / bus / lunch / because everybody / very hungry .


<b>V / Listen </b>.You are going to listen to Lily talking about her self . You are going to listen
twice . Check (v) the correct box for True or False ( 2,0 Ps )


<b>Statements</b> <b>True</b> <b>False</b>


1 Lily comes from China


2 English is important to her as she will need it for her future job
3 She started learning English when she was eighteen .


4 She has a problem with listening .


5 She can understand people when they speak fast .
6 She does not find English difficult to learn .
7 She wants to be an English teacher .


8 She loves English songs , but she does not hope to become a singer .
Tapescrift :



</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×